Metasys SystemUL86410thEditionUUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLCSmokeControlSystem · 2020. 7. 30. · IFC-320.....36 Simplex4100ESFireAlarmControlPanel.....37

Metasys® System UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13UUKLC Smoke Control System

Code No. LIT-12012487Software Release 8.1

Issued November 15, 2017Updated July 15, 2020

Refer to the Knowledge Exchange website for the most up-to-date version of this document.

Document Introduction.............................................................................................................7Installations Outside of United States and Canada.........................................................................8

Smoke Control Overview..........................................................................................................8Two Valid Options for Smoke Control...............................................................................................8Migrating to UL 864 10th Edition.......................................................................................................9Software Revision Labels...................................................................................................................11Smoke Control Definitions...............................................................................................................12SCT, LCT, and CCT Standard Applications Library.......................................................................12References.........................................................................................................................................12

Smoke Control Product Labeling...........................................................................................13Factory and Production Date Codes...............................................................................................13Factory Location List...........................................................................................................................14Hardware Revision............................................................................................................................14Software and Firmware Version Numbering..................................................................................14Software Upgrades...........................................................................................................................14Software Patches................................................................................................................................15Installation Instructions Revision Level.........................................................................................15

Smoke Control Requirements................................................................................................15UL 864 Tenth Edition Coexistence with Eighth and Ninth Editions.............................................15Firefighters Smoke Control Station (FSCS)...................................................................................18FSCS Guidelines and Requirements..................................................................................................18NAE Requirements.............................................................................................................................20

Metasys System Smoke Control System Overview.............................................................20Smoke Control Application Examples............................................................................................20Overview of HVAC Smoke Control System Types.........................................................................23Central Systems..................................................................................................................................23Dedicated Smoke Control Systems....................................................................................................23Non-Dedicated Smoke Control Systems............................................................................................23Individual Floor Fan Units...................................................................................................................23Fan Coil Units/Water Source Heat Pumps..........................................................................................23Induction Units....................................................................................................................................23Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems....................................................................................................24Smoke Dampers.................................................................................................................................24Design Considerations........................................................................................................................24Smoke Control Strategies...................................................................................................................24Initiating Devices.................................................................................................................................25End-to-End Verification.......................................................................................................................26Fan Relay Supervision........................................................................................................................26Response Times.................................................................................................................................26

Fire Alarm Annunciation Panels.............................................................................................34IFC2-640.............................................................................................................................................34IFC2-3030...........................................................................................................................................35

1Metasys® System UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Smoke Control System

https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/bas

IFC-320...............................................................................................................................................36Simplex 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel.....................................................................................37

Surge Protection Devices.......................................................................................................38Ethernet Surge Protection...............................................................................................................38American Power Conversion (APC) PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protector.........................................38Power Surge Protection...................................................................................................................41Tripp Lite ISOBAR8ULTRA 8-Outlet Surge Protector.........................................................................41Tripp Lite ISOBAR12ULTRA 12-Outlet Surge Protector.....................................................................42Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO-4 4-Outlet Surge Protector........................................................................44Communication Bus and Field Controller I/O Transient Protection............................................45SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit....................................................................................46SMK-MOVKIT-BRD Transient Protection Kit......................................................................................53SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Transorb Kit for Field Bus Repeater..................................................................57Field Controller I/O Transient Protection.............................................................................................59

Network Communications.......................................................................................................64Copper Cable Connections..............................................................................................................65Fiber-Optic Cable Connections.......................................................................................................66ST Style Connectors...........................................................................................................................6624-Port Ethernet Switches: Cisco Catalyst 2960 and Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U.........................67Wiring..................................................................................................................................................68Specifications......................................................................................................................................68UL/cUL Label Placement....................................................................................................................6924-Port Ethernet Switch: Cisco IE 4010-4S24P..............................................................................69Wiring..................................................................................................................................................70Specifications......................................................................................................................................71UL/cUL Label Placement....................................................................................................................7216-Port Ethernet Switch: Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-E..........................................................................72Wiring..................................................................................................................................................73Specifications......................................................................................................................................73UL/cUL Label Placement....................................................................................................................745-Port Ethernet Switches: Contemporary Controls® CTRLink™ EISK5-100T and NetgearFS105..................................................................................................................................................76Wiring..................................................................................................................................................77Specifications......................................................................................................................................77UL/cUL Label Placement....................................................................................................................788-Port Ethernet Switch: Contemporary Controls® CTRLink™ EIS8-100T..................................79Flow Control Jumper Options.............................................................................................................81Internal LEDs......................................................................................................................................81Wiring..................................................................................................................................................82Specifications......................................................................................................................................82UL/cUL Label Placement....................................................................................................................834-Port Ethernet Switch: Contemporary Controls CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT...................................84Flow Jumper Options..........................................................................................................................86Duplex Jumper Options - Fiber...........................................................................................................86Internal LEDs......................................................................................................................................87Wiring..................................................................................................................................................87Specifications......................................................................................................................................88UL/cUL Label Placement....................................................................................................................88Single-Port Media Converter: Contemporary Controls® EIMK-100T/FT.....................................89Wiring..................................................................................................................................................90Specifications......................................................................................................................................93

2

UL/cUL Label Placement....................................................................................................................93Smoke Control Network Automation Engines......................................................................95

Device Layout....................................................................................................................................95Power Supply....................................................................................................................................96Wiring.................................................................................................................................................96Power Wiring.......................................................................................................................................97Disconnecting Power from the NAE..................................................................................................100Communication Bus Wiring.................................................................................................................97End-of-Line Switch............................................................................................................................98Performance and Testing Guidelines/Limitations for Network Engines.....................................98Wiring Considerations and Guidelines for Network Integrations................................................98Powering On the NAE.......................................................................................................................99LED Test Sequence at Startup.........................................................................................................99Disconnecting Power from the NAE.............................................................................................100System Re-Boot Switch..................................................................................................................100Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................................100LED Status Indicators.......................................................................................................................100Specifications..................................................................................................................................101UL/cUL Label Placement................................................................................................................104

N2 Bus.....................................................................................................................................105N2 Bus Overview.............................................................................................................................105N2 Bus Rules and Recommendations..........................................................................................106N2 Bus Specifications....................................................................................................................107Device Addressing on the N2 Bus................................................................................................108End-of-Line Termination on the N2 Bus........................................................................................112Wiring the N2 Bus...........................................................................................................................112Screw Terminal Blocks for Connecting N2 Bus Cable......................................................................114Grounding the N2 Bus Cable Shield.................................................................................................114N2 Bus Repeater.............................................................................................................................115Physical Features.............................................................................................................................117Setting EOL for the N2 Bus Repeater...............................................................................................117Repeater Specifications....................................................................................................................118UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................119N2 Bus Transient Protection..........................................................................................................119

N2 Bus Controllers................................................................................................................119Standard N2 Bus Field Controller Features, Connections, and Guidelines..............................119Mounting...........................................................................................................................................120N2 Bus Terminal Block......................................................................................................................120Supply Power Terminals...................................................................................................................120Input and Output Wiring Guidelines..................................................................................................121Cable and Wire Length Guidelines...................................................................................................123Maximum Cable Length versus Load Current..................................................................................123AHU Controllers..............................................................................................................................124Physical Features.............................................................................................................................126Wiring................................................................................................................................................127Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................128Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................129Specifications....................................................................................................................................130UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................131DX9100 Controllers.........................................................................................................................131Physical Features.............................................................................................................................133

3

Wiring................................................................................................................................................133Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................135Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................136Specifications....................................................................................................................................136UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................138Extension Modules (XTMs) and Expansion Modules (XPs)........................................................138Physical Features.............................................................................................................................139Wiring................................................................................................................................................140Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................141Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................142Specifications....................................................................................................................................143UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................149UNT100 Controllers........................................................................................................................150Physical Features.............................................................................................................................151Wiring................................................................................................................................................152Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................152Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................153Specifications....................................................................................................................................154UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................155VAV100 Controllers.........................................................................................................................156Physical Features.............................................................................................................................157Wiring................................................................................................................................................158Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................159Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................159Specifications....................................................................................................................................161UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................162VMA1400 Controllers......................................................................................................................163Physical Features.............................................................................................................................165Wiring................................................................................................................................................165Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................166Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................167Specifications....................................................................................................................................167UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................168

MS/TP Bus..............................................................................................................................169MS/TP Bus Overview......................................................................................................................169FC Bus Example..............................................................................................................................170SA Bus Example.............................................................................................................................170Local FC Bus Rules and Specifications.......................................................................................171Baud Rates on the MS/TP Bus.........................................................................................................173MS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations..............................................................................................174SA Bus Rules and Specifications..................................................................................................176SA Bus Device Limits........................................................................................................................178SA Buses with Multiple Network Sensors.........................................................................................180Device Addressing on the MS/TP Bus..........................................................................................180Setting a Device Address..................................................................................................................181End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus.................................................................................183End-of-Line Termination on Local FC Bus........................................................................................184End-of-Line Termination on SA Bus..................................................................................................185TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices.......................................................185EOL Terminator Module..................................................................................................................186Location and Mounting Considerations for MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator Module.......................187

4

Wiring the MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator Module.........................................................................188Specifications....................................................................................................................................189Wiring the MS/TP Bus.....................................................................................................................191Screw Terminal Blocks for Connecting FC and SA Bus Cables.......................................................192Grounding the MS/TP Bus Cable Shield...........................................................................................193RJ-Style Modular Jack and Cables for SA Bus.................................................................................194FC Bus Repeater.............................................................................................................................195Physical Features.............................................................................................................................196Setting EOL for the FC Bus Repeater...............................................................................................196Specifications....................................................................................................................................197UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................197FC and SA Bus Transient Protection............................................................................................198Commissioning Devices on the FC Bus.......................................................................................198

MS/TP Bus Controllers..........................................................................................................198Standard Field Controller Features, Connections, and Guidelines...........................................198Mounting...........................................................................................................................................199FC Bus Terminal Block......................................................................................................................199SA Bus Terminal Block......................................................................................................................199Supply Power Terminal Block...........................................................................................................200Input and Output Wiring Guidelines..................................................................................................201Cable and Wire Length Guidelines...................................................................................................207Maximum Cable Length versus Load Current..................................................................................207FAC Advanced Application Field Equipment Controllers...........................................................208Physical Features.............................................................................................................................209Wiring................................................................................................................................................211Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................212Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................212Specifications....................................................................................................................................213UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................215FEU and FEC Field Equipment Controllers..................................................................................216Physical Features.............................................................................................................................217Wiring................................................................................................................................................218Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................219Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................220Specifications....................................................................................................................................221UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................223IOM Field Equipment Controllers..................................................................................................224Physical Features.............................................................................................................................225Wiring................................................................................................................................................228Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................229Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................232Specifications....................................................................................................................................233UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................235VMA1600 Controllers......................................................................................................................237Physical Features.............................................................................................................................238Wiring................................................................................................................................................239Transient Protection..........................................................................................................................240Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................241Specifications....................................................................................................................................241UL/cUL Label Placement..................................................................................................................243

Smoke Control System Software.........................................................................................246

5

SCT, LCT, and CCT..........................................................................................................................246HVAC PRO and GX-9100 Configuration Tool................................................................................247System Programming Guidelines for Smoke Control.................................................................247

Enclosures and Accessories................................................................................................247PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply...............................................................................................248

Wiring...............................................................................................................................................249Power Supply Connections...........................................................................................................249Specifications..................................................................................................................................250UL/cUL Label Placement................................................................................................................250

PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply............................................................................................251Wiring...............................................................................................................................................252Power Supply Connections...........................................................................................................252Specifications..................................................................................................................................253UL/cUL Label Placement................................................................................................................253

PAN-PWRSP-IU Power Supply..............................................................................................254Wiring...............................................................................................................................................256Power Supply Connections...........................................................................................................256Specifications..................................................................................................................................257UL/cUL Label Placement................................................................................................................257

PA0P00010FC0-U Power Distribution Panel and Enclosure..............................................259PA0P00010FC0-U Specifications...................................................................................................261UL/cUL Label Placement................................................................................................................261

Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control Panel.........................................263Non-Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control Panel.................................263Smoke Control Enclosures...................................................................................................263

Standard Enclosures......................................................................................................................263Custom Enclosures........................................................................................................................263VAV Box Enclosures.......................................................................................................................264Enclosures Requiring a Union Label............................................................................................265Enclosures Requiring External Plastic Identification Tags........................................................266

Ordering and Revision Information......................................................................................266General Smoke Control Ordering Requirements................................................................266Related Documentation.........................................................................................................282Typical Panel Layouts for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing.................................................282Description of Operation.......................................................................................................286Compliance Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing.................................................286

Overview..........................................................................................................................................286Compliance Survey.........................................................................................................................287General Requirements Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing........................................288FSCS Requirements Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing............................................289Wiring Requirements Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing..........................................290Application Programming Requirements for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing..........................291

6

Document IntroductionThis document provides sales representatives, project engineers, application engineers, system specialists andinstallers with the information necessary to sell, engineer, and install aMetasys® system smoke control system thatcomplies with the Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® (UL) requirements for the UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC10th Edition Smoke Control Listing. This listing applies to an indoor, dry environment only, where each Air HandlingUnit (AHU) is located in an indoor, air-conditioned mechanical space. This listing also applies to an application wherea Rooftop Unit (RTU) is located outside but the smoke control panel servicing the RTU is mounted in an indoor,conditioned mechanical space, with conduit wire runs to the RTU. However, this listing does not support applicationswhere smoke control equipment is mounted in the RTU itself, or where equipment is exposed to a damp or wetenvironment. Lastly, the listing is intended for building systems in United States and Canada.

To comply with the listing, youmust follow the requirements and restrictions placed on theMetasys system componentsas detailed in this and other Metasys system documentation applying to the UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC10th Edition Smoke Control Listing (hereafter referred to as UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition). The restrictionsapply to both used and assembled Metasys system components. If you are unsure if your particular applicationcomplies with the UL 864 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing, contact your nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Important: Smoke control applications require extra care during installation, commissioning, and servicing. Makesure to read all smoke control documentation and follow all procedures carefully to ensure compliancewith the UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Standard for Smoke Control. For a completelist of documents, see Related Documentation. Also, smoke control equipment carries strict orderingguidelines. For example, all panels for smoke control must be ordered directly from the Johnson Controlsfactory. See General Smoke Control Ordering Requirements.

Important: Before you upgrade the facility to use a Metasys Release 8.1 smoke control system that is UL 864UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, youmust meet with the customer to determine whetherthe currently installed fire detection system is at UL/cUL 864 UOJZ 9th Edition or 10th Edition. If thefire detection system is at an older edition, you must upgrade the fire detection system to UL/cUL 864UOJZ 10th Edition before upgrading to theMetasys UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Editionsmoke control system. Also, if applicable, verify that the customer has installed the UL/cUL 864 UOXX9th Edition or 10th Edition Accessories for Fire Alarm Graphic Annunciators and Remote Fire AlarmPanels before upgrading the smoke control system.

Notes:

• The Intelligent Fire Controller (IFC) fire system or third-party fire system is the primary fire annunciation station.(Refer to the Metasys System Extended Architecture Fire System Integration Using the IFC BACnet GatewayApplication Note [LIT-1201993] for more information.) The Johnson Controls Metasys system smoke controlsystem is used as a secondary fire annunciation station.

• This document specifically addresses the Johnson ControlsMetasys system smoke control system. This documentprovides information on the Ethernet-based systems, communication equipment, and MS/TP Bus controllersand migrated N2 Bus controllers necessary to create aMetasys system smoke control application. Do not confusethe system in this document with the Metasys System Smoke Control UL 864 9th Edition system. For a list ofall UL 864 10th Edition Listed MS/TP controllers, and legacy N2 Bus controllers that were approved for UL 864UUKL/UUKLC 8th Edition and can be migrated, see Table 125 and Table 126.

• If you wish to apply the UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing to a countryoutside of United States or Canada, you must follow certain restrictions: (1) the installation must be approvedby the local Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ); (2) the installation must be approved by the Johnson ControlsLegal department and Metasys product management; (3) all equipment must be installed in custom enclosures(see Table 124); (4) the PAN-PWRSP-IU power supply must be used; and (5) the Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO4Surge Protector that is rated for 230 VAC must be used (see Table 131).


Installations Outside of United States and CanadaIf you have a building controls contract that must have a UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition SmokeControl Listing in a country outside of United States or Canada, you must adhere to the following restrictions:

• the job specification and/or contract must be provided and reviewed by authorized personnel• the installation must be approved by the Johnson Controls Legal department andMetasys product management• all equipment must be installed in custom UL 864 listed NEMA1 enclosures (see Table 124 )• the PAN-PWRSP-IU power supply must be used (see Table 124)• the Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO4 Surge Protector that is rated for 230 VAC must be used (see Table 131)• all checklists under the Compliance Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing section must be reviewed and

completed by authorized personnel

Smoke Control Overview

Two Valid Options for Smoke ControlFigure 1 illustrates two methods for applying smoke control at a facility. With the first option, the Metasys system isresponsible for initiating smoke control sequences (in addition to energy management), and the fire detection systemis responsible for detecting a fire. This document describes how to apply that option. In the second option, theMetasys system is responsible for energy management and the fire detection system is responsible for detecting afire and initiating smoke control sequences. No interaction occurs between the two sides of the application. Also,any hybrid of these two example systems is not permitted unless approved by Johnson Controls and the AHJ.


Figure 1: Two Valid Smoke Control Systems

Migrating to UL 864 10th EditionYou are permitted to migrate an existing UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 8th Edition or 9th Edition SmokeControl System from its existing Metasys release to UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition with Metasys Release 8.1.However, you need to follow the specific instructions stated here.

For migrating UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 8th Edition:

• Before you upgrade the facility to use a Metasys Release 8.1 smoke control system that is UL 864UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, you must verify that the facility's Fire Alarm system is listed atUL/cUL 864 UOJZ 10th Edition. Even though you may have contracted to supply a Metasys UL 864UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition smoke control system, you must inform the customer that the FireAlarm system must be listed at UL/cUL 864 UOJZ 10th Edition and must also be listed at UL/cUL 864 UOXX10th Edition Accessories for Fire Alarm Graphic Annunciators and Remote Fire Alarm Panels. You must discuss


this requirement upfront with the customer and include this requirement in your smoke control system contractand proposal, then use the requirements outlined in this document for installing the smoke control system.

• Only use equipment that is UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed, as listed in the tables underthe General Smoke Control Ordering Requirements section of this document.

• Replace NCM supervisory controllers from Metasys Generation 1 (Gen1) with Network Automation Engines(NAEs) at Metasys Generation 3 (Gen3) that provide equivalent functionality.

• Replace unsupported field controllers from Metasys Gen1 with field controllers at Metasys Gen3 that provideequivalent functionality. To determine if your field controllers are still supported, see Table 126. Some older N2Bus controllers, such as the Air Handling Unit (AHU), Variable Air Volume (VAV), and DX9100 controllers, canbe migrated to UL 864 10th Edition with the newer Metasys Gen3 architecture. However, if you need to replaceN2 Bus controllers that are not supported, select equivalent MS/TP controllers listed in Table 125.

• Replace any existing Firefighters Smoke Control Station (FSCS) panel that has N2 Bus devices with the newerMS/TP version of the FSCS panel. For more information, see Firefighters Smoke Control Station (FSCS).

• Expand point capacity to older equipment if required, but only by adding new XPs.• Verify proper use of transient protection and the correct use of N2 Bus repeaters as you migrate to UL 864 10th

Edition.• Verify that you are using true feedback for all dampers (both fully open and fully close) and true fan start proof

(for example, with a duct flow switch). Any deviations must be approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ).

• See Smoke Control Requirements for more information and installation rules.

For migrating UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 9th Edition:

• Before you upgrade the facility to use a Metasys Release 8.1 smoke control system that is UL 864UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, you must verify that the facility's Fire Alarm system is listed atUL/cUL 864 UOJZ 10th Edition. Even though you may have contracted to supply a Metasys UL 864UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition smoke control system, you must inform the customer that the FireAlarm system must be listed at UL/cUL 864 UOJZ 10th Edition and must also be listed at UL/cUL 864 UOXX10th Edition Accessories for Fire Alarm Graphic Annunciators and Remote Fire Alarm Panels. You must discussthis requirement upfront with the customer and include this requirement in your smoke control system contractand proposal, then use the requirements outlined in this document for installing the smoke control system.

• Only use equipment that is UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed, as described in the tablesunder the General Smoke Control Ordering Requirements section of this document.

• Replace all MS-NAE5510-0U network engines with newer MS-NAE5510-2U or MS-NAE5510-3U models inenclosures as listed in Table 123. The MS-NAE5510-0U network engines cannot be used withMetasys Release8.1. You must order the UL/cUL 864 Listed NAE from the Reynosa, Mexico panel group as either a UL 864UUKL/UUKLC Listed standard or custom panel.

• Contact Automation Displays, Inc. (ADI) at http://www.adipanel.com to determine if your existing FSCS panelcan be migrated to UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition. Older panels may not be supported. To replace the panel,work with ADI and your local AHJ to design and order a replacement FSCS panel. The panel drawing must beapproved by the AHJ before the new panel can be ordered from ADI.

• See Smoke Control Requirements for more information and installation rules.

Important: Failure to follow the upgrade guidelines, requirements, and procedures listed in this document voidsthe UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing.


http://www.adipanel.com

Software Revision LabelsEvery controller (NAE or field controller) in a UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control System must beclearly marked with its current software version using the approved software revision labels. When a smoke controlsystem is upgraded toMetasysRelease 8.1, the Johnson Controls branch office or local installer applies the followinglabels:

• S/W Ver SCT 12.0 label to all NAE controllers in the field• S/W Ver CCT 10.3, RM 10.2 label to all FEC, IOM, and VMA controllers in the field• N2 Migration, Metasys Release 8.1 label to all AHU, UNT, VAV10x, VMA14xx, DX9100, and XTM/XP

controllers/modules in the field

The label examples shown in Figure 2 are printed on UL-approved label material. See Table 127 for a descriptionof the product code number (SMK-UPLABL-1U) to use when ordering labels.

Notes:

• Do not apply a software revision label over an existing UL 864 label or any other label already affixed to acontroller.

• Because the MS-FEU1610-0U in the FSCS panel is programmed by ADI, do not apply a software revision labelto it.

Figure 2: Software Revision Labels


Smoke Control DefinitionsThe following table provides the Johnson Controls smoke control definitions.

Table 1: Smoke Control DefinitionsDefinitionTermDescribes the local agency responsible for local agency code restrictions,inspections, and approvals of the smoke control site. The local AHJ can providewritten approval for all deviations or required changes to the listed smoke controlsystem or applications that are required by the local city, state, or governmentagency. Certifications are necessary for local specific code restrictions orsequence requirements.

Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

Changes the affected smoke control area or zone from an automatic HVACcontrolling sequence to an automatic smoke control sequence or manual smokecontrol sequence from the FSCS panel control to maintain a negative pressurein the affected area or zone.

Depressurization (Exhaust)

Changes the adjacent areas next to the affected smoke control area or zonefrom an automatic HVAC controlling sequence to an automatic smoke controlsequence or manual smoke control sequence from the FSCS panel control tosupply a positive pressure in the specific area or zone to help prevent the spreadof smoke.

Pressurization

Changes the currently active automatic HVAC, automatic smoke controlsequence, or manual smoke control sequence to supply fresh air andsimultaneously exhaust air from the specific area or zone when you select themanual purge smoke control sequence from the FSCS panel. Purge is generallyused after the initiating smoke control event is cleared and secured, and youwant to reenter into the affected areas.

Purge

SCT, LCT, and CCT Standard Applications LibraryThe three offline tools that you use to engineer, install, and commission the Smoke Control System include thefollowing:

• System Configuration Tool (SCT): creates archive databases that you later download to a smoke control NAE.SCT is used in all phases of engineering, installing, and commissioning of supervisory controllers (called networkengines) and field controllers that make up the Metasys smoke control system.

• Logic Connector Tool (LCT): creates the logic and control for the standard smoke control applications. TheLCT is part of SCT.

• Controller Configuration Tool (CCT): creates applications that configure the hardware I/O in a field controller.Sample smoke control applications that are provided on the Johnson Controls Branch Purchase Package (BPP).

To commission older N2 Bus controllers that you want to migrate to UL/cUL 864 10th Edition, use the legacy tools,such as HVAC PRO, XTM Configurator, and the GX-9100 software configuration tool.

You can install and execute any of the standard smoke control applications on any smoke control listed NAE. Usethe standard smoke control applications as written; any sequence modification to the LCT program must bepre-approved by the AHJ. Also, SCT must not be accessible to anyone other than designated qualified technicianswho are responsible for installing, commissioning, and maintaining the smoke control site configuration. Passwordprotection in SCT prevents unauthorized users from logging in to SCT for the purpose of editing and downloadingsmoke control sequences.

ReferencesWhen designing a smoke control system, you must read and become familiar with the following documents, codes,and standards, as applicable:

• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 92A Recommended Practice for Smoke Control Systems• NFPA 92B Guide for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Areas


• NFPA 70 National Electrical Code• NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code• NFPA 101 Life Safety Code• NFPA 90 Standard for Air Conditioning• NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems• International Code Council (ICC), which includes:

Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA) model code-- International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) model code- Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI) regulations

• UL 864 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, 10th Edition, December 1, 2014• ORD-C100-13 Smoke Control System Equipment

Smoke Control Product LabelingFigure 3 shows several UL/cUL 864 equipment label examples.

Figure 3: UUKL/UUKLC Equipment Label Examples

Factory and Production Date CodesJohnson Controls UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed products have a coded label thatdesignates the factory where the product was produced and its production year and week. The label format isLLLYYWW, where:

• LLL is the 1 to 3 character factory location code• YY is the last 2 digits of the calendar year• WW is a 2 digit number corresponding to the week of the current calendar year (01 thru 52)

Figure 4 shows an example label code RY1 1749 for a part manufactured at the Reynosa, Mexico, Factory Plant 1,in the 49th week of 2017.

Figure 4: Example Label with Date Code


Factory Location ListThe following table lists a few factory location examples used on product labels.

Table 2: Smoke Control System Factory Location Code TableFactory LocationFactory CodePlant 1, Reynosa, MexicoRY1Plant 2, Reynosa, MexicoRY2Louisville, KentuckyLKYEnvironmental Technologies, Inc. (ETI) of Johnson Controls, Largo, FLETI

Hardware RevisionTheMetasys Smoke Control System hardware revision level appears in the ordering section of this manual for eachcomponent. See Ordering and Revision Information.

Software and Firmware Version NumberingMetasys smoke control system software uses an X.x.Y.y numbering scheme, where:

• X is the major release• x is the minor release• Y.y is the software build number

Example: 8.1.0.3024

TheMetasys software products with release numbers that are permitted for use with the 10th Edition Smoke ControlSystem are the following:

• Site Management Portal (SMP): Release 8.1.0.3024• SCT: Release 12.0.0.3270• CCT: Release 10.3.0.558, RM 10.2

All of the component revision levels appear in Ordering and Revision Information. For the UL/cUL components, allthe revision levels appear on the UL/cUL label.

Software UpgradesWhen upgrading a 10th Edition smoke control system to a major revision, such as from Release 5.2 to Release 8.1,be sure to respect the published object count for each network engine in the smoke control system. If a networkengine exceeds its object count limit, you must add another network engine to ensure the smoke control systemfunctions properly. Also, you must order the network engine in a UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Listed customor standard panel. For example, you cannot mount an extra smoke control network engine in the field to a new panelor to an existing panel. See Performance and Testing Guidelines/Limitations for Network Engines.

Important: An object count that exceeds 5000 objects for the MS-NAE5510-2U or MS-NAE5510-3U voids the UL864 UUKL 10th Edition listing.

Also, when you upgrade a smoke control system from a previous UL/cUL 864 Listing, you must affix the appropriateupgrade label sticker to each controller that you have upgraded as follows:

• MS-NAE5510-1U, MS-NAE5510-2U, or MS-NAE5510-2UW: affix the S/W Ver SCT 12.0 label. Do not cover upany other label on the device.

• MS-FEC, MS-FEU, MS-IOM, MS-IOU, MS-VMA: affix the S/W Ver CCT 10.3, RM 10.2 label. Do not cover upany other label on the device.


• DX-9100, AP-AHU, AS-UNT, YK-UNT, AS-VAV101, AP-VMA14xx (legacy N2 Bus field controllers): affix theMigration Metasys Release 8.1 label. Do not cover up any other label on the device.

• MS-FEU1610-0U: do not use an upgrade label because this controller that is installed in the FSCS ADI panelis not upgraded.

Software PatchesBe sure to install any Metasys system smoke control software patches that were released after the smoke controlsystem was installed or upgraded.

To install Metasys system software patches for smoke control, contact your local Johnson Controls office or browseto the Field Support Center (FSC) Product Quick Patch page at:

https://my.jci.com/sites/BE/NAFieldSupport/quick-patches

For North American Authorized Building Controls Specialists (ABCS) Partners, log in to the ABCS Exchange siteand search under Metasys > Technical Support > Software Patches.

On the patches web site, make sure you use the software patches that apply only to the Metasys System Release8.1 UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control System. Follow the installation instructions to apply the patch.

Installation Instructions Revision LevelMetasys smoke control system installation instructions depict the current revision level of the document in the upperright corner of the cover page in the format of month, day, year.

Smoke Control Requirements

UL 864 Tenth Edition Coexistence with Eighth and Ninth EditionsFor some installations, a mixed UL 864 system that consists of different UL 864 Listings is allowed. For example,Wing 1 of a hospital could remain at UL 864 8th Edition, Wing 2 could remain at UL 864 9th Edition, and the newWing 3 could be installed with UL 864 10th Edition. However, any combined smoke control systemmust be approvedin writing by the local AHJ prior to the installation of any UL 864 10th Edition equipment.

To maintain the UL/cUL smoke control listing, you must follow these rules for a smoke control system where UL864 8th Edition, 9th Edition, and 10th Edition smoke control equipment coexist:

• The isolation of each edition of UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC smoke control must occur at an Ethernet switch that isapproved for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition.

• The 8th Edition Smoke Control System must be installed and operating as detailed in the Johnson ControlsMetasys System Smoke Control UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 8th Edition literature. Refer to the Metasys® SystemExtended Architecture Smoke Control System Technical Bulletin (LIT-1201684).

• The 9th Edition Smoke Control System must be installed and operating as detailed in the Johnson ControlsMetasys System Smoke Control UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 9th Edition literature. Refer to theMetasys® System UL864 9th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Smoke Control System Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011252).

• The 10th Edition smoke control system must be installed and operate as detailed in this document and any otherJohnson Controls Metasys System UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control System literature.

• The 8th or 9th Edition Smoke Control System cannot be expanded by adding devices that are newly listed foronly 10th Edition Smoke Control. Eighth Edition smoke control systems must remain legacy N2 Bus only. NinthEdition smoke control systems must remain MS/TP (FC) Bus only, but 10th Edition smoke control systems canbe both MS/TP (FC) Bus and legacy N2 Bus.

• If an 8th or 9th Edition supervisory controller requires replacement, it must only be replaced with an 8th Editionor 9th Edition smoke control replacement part, respectively. Tenth Edition supervisory controllers are not allowed



https://partners.jci.com/sites/252014111546

as 8th or 9th Edition replacement parts. The Johnson Controls Repair Center in Louisville, Kentucky, providessmoke control replacements.

• The operation of the smoke control applications must have continuity between the two systems: floor above/floorbelow, and so forth. Smoke control applications must be programmed to allow smoke control between all floorsas if a single system were controlling the building. Most importantly, 8th or 9th Edition smoke control operationscannot affect or influence the operation of 10th Edition smoke control operations.

• All 10th Edition hardware must be loaded with the latest version of Metasys software approved for use with theUL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing. You may have non-smoke control hardware at adifferent release level than the smoke control hardware, but all smoke control hardware must be at the samerelease. For example, you can have two NAEs not approved for smoke control at Release 5.2 and 8.1, but ifyou have two NAEs approved for smoke control, they must both be at Release 5.2 or Release 8.1. In addition,if you are using an Application and Data Server (ADS) or Extended Application and Data Server (ADX) to viewthe system, this device must be at the same (or higher) Metasys release approved for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC10th Edition Smoke Control.

Note: The ADS/ADX may be at a higher release ofMetasys software than the smoke control components becausethe ADS/ADX does not perform, and is not listed for, smoke control functions.

• All field controllers in a smoke control system (with the exception of the MS-FEU1610-0U in the FSCS panel)must be at the same software revision. The MS-FEU1610-0U in the FSCS panel must be at Metasys ReleaseCCT 4.1.

Figure 5 shows a representation of coexisting 9th Edition and 10th Edition Smoke Control Systems.


Figure 5: Coexisting 9th Edition and 10th Edition Smoke Control System


Firefighters Smoke Control Station (FSCS)

FSCS Guidelines and RequirementsFollow these guidelines and requirements:

• Use a UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed FSCS to provide manual control of smoke controlsystems. You must use the FSCS panel from Automation Displays, Inc. (ADI), which has its own listing with theJohnson Controls MS-FEU1610-0U controller and PAN-PWRSP-U transformer. The local Johnson Controlsoffice orders the MS-FEU1610-0U controller and PAN-PWRSP-U transformer from the Johnson Controls factory,and ships the two items to ADI to install in the FSCS panel. ADI programs the MS-FEU1610-0U controller withCCT 4.1 using a special tool. Contact ADI at http://www.adipanel.com.

• Do not upgrade a MS-FEU1610-0U controller in the field. The MS-FEU1610-0U controller, which is enclosed inthe FSCS panel, must be sent to ADI for a software revision. Upgrading the controller in the field voids the UL864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition listing. Contact ADI at http://www.adipanel.com.

• Provide a graphical representation of the building’s smoke control system to the AHJ and the fire marshal forapproval before ordering an ADI panel. The drawing must clearly indicate the type and location of all smokecontrol equipment. Obtain approval of the drawing from the AHJ and local fire marshal before submitting to ADI.

• Provide positive indication of operation on the FSCS for all smoke control equipment; for example, the controlleddamper reaches its intended position.

• Configure each Binary Output (BO) object used for pressurization and exhaust control outputs with positivefeedback. Positive feedback monitors the associated controlled equipment status. Typically, smoke controldampers provide a pair of feedback binary inputs for the two damper end switches, full open and full closed. Forsmoke control fans, provide positive indication of airflow with either a flow switch or pressure differential sensorto determine the intended operating status of the fan.

• Display the status of all smoke control systems on the FSCS as directed by the local building codes. This includesboth the fully open status and the fully closed status of each damper, the status of each fan used for smokecontrol, and the airflow status of every fan.

• Indicate, both visibly and audibly, on the FSCS any trouble conditions when smoke control equipment does notrespond to automatic or manual commands. The FSCS controls the Sonalert® logic for all smoke control systems;no other application is necessary.

• Prevent the duct smoke detectors from stopping any smoke control fans once the smoke control system hasbeen activated, if the smoke control strategy is such that the return duct exhausts the smoke from the buildingduring the smoke control system operation. Duct smoke detectors are often located in the return duct of an HVACfan and connected to stop the fan when smoke is detected, which is in compliance with NFPA 90A.

• Allow the overriding of theWeekly Dedicated Test sequence with higher priority commands. Refer to theMetasysSystem UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Standard Smoke Control Applications ApplicationNote (LIT-12012544) for more information. All dedicated smoke control systems require the Weekly DedicatedTest to verify the continuous proper operation of Smoke Control Dampers and Fans.

• Assign the highest priority to the automatic activation of any smoke control sequence of operation over anyWeekly Dedicated Test, automatic environmental control strategy, or any non-smoke control manual commands.When an automatic smoke control sequence is initiated, the system design must bypass the following operationaloverrides:

- High and Low Temperature Protection Devices (specifically, A-11 and A-25 Series Temperature ProtectionDevices)

- Return and Exhaust Air Duct Smoke Detectors• Make the indication of a trouble condition from any air duct smoke detector available to FSCS operators so that

they are able to make informed decisions concerning their override actions if smoke is detected elsewhere,especially in the supply air. This indication can be in the form of annunciation on the fire alarm system controlpanel or a remote annunciator controlled by the fire alarm system.




• Assign the highest priority to the FSCS to manually activate or deactivate any predefined smoke control strategy.Give automatic smoke control a higher priority than any manual or automatic HVAC application. Give the WeeklyDedicated test higher priority than any manual or automatic HVAC application.

• Configure the system so that after a smoke alarm is received and acted upon automatically by the smoke controlsystem, additional smoke alarms do not cause the smoke control system to perform secondary actionsautomatically. The system must execute any manual commands from the FSCS.

• Ensure that all communication links between buildings are fiber-optic cable and you are using the approvedmedia converter.

• Ensure that all communication links between rooms are copper cable buried in a conduit that is separate frompower wiring. Conduit installation must be compliant with local building requirements.

• Ensure that response time for individual smoke control components to reach their intended position from thepoint of command does not exceed the following time periods: 60 seconds for fan operation at the desired stateplus 90 seconds to annunciate and 75 seconds for completion of damper travel plus 90 seconds to annunciate.In the case of fan start after damper close, add these times. If the damper must be closed before the fan starts,the total response time could be up to 135 seconds for operation, 75 seconds for damper to close plus 60 secondsfor fan to start. Time to annunciate is added to this time. (Control system response is the time from automaticdetection of a smoke condition to the issuing of the first smoke control command to the equipment.)

• Use only the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed network engines to interface all input andoutput smoke control points.

• Observe the status of the Programming LED.When illuminated, the Programming LED indicates that an operatoris currently making changes to the smoke control system logic. When off, the Programming LED indicates thatno logic changes are being made.

• Make sure the FSCS has full monitoring and manual control capability over all smoke control systems andequipment.

• Provide at the FSCS the capability to override (partially or in full) any operation in progress, including programmedactions, non-smoke control manual overrides, and non-smoke control bypasses.

• Provide the ability to activate an audible signal at the FSCS if the operation proof sensor (feedback point) failedto provide positive feedback that its command was executed within the allowed response time.

• Configure hardware supervision alarms, such as binary feedback trouble on fans and dampers, as well as thesystem trouble points, that turn on the FSCS alarm horn.

• Use only one FSCS on a Metasys network to run all smoke control applications, unless multiple FSCSs areapproved by the AHJ.

Note: You must use an approved UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed graphical panel as yourFSCS. Contact ADI for an approved FSCS panel. ADI ships approved panels to both the United States andCanada. Contact: Automation Displays, Inc. (ADI), 3533 N. White Avenue, Eau Claire, WI 54703 (715)834-9595, http://www.adipanel.com

You can connect the FSCS to any UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed NAE with an activeMS/TP FC Bus or N2 Bus present in the network. For a list of supported NAEs, see Table 125.

The MS-FEU1610-0U controller and PAN-PWRSP-U transformer are installed in the FSCS enclosure. First, orderand ship the controller and transformer to ADI. Then, ADI programs and installs the MS-FEU1610-0U and powersupply at the factory. The MS-FEU1610-0U has a special conversion code that allows the FSCS to integrate as anFC bus device.

Important: You cannot add extra I/O to the MS-FEU1610-0U controller in the ADI FSCS panel. Also, you cannotmodify the MS-FEU1610-0U controller enclosed in the FSCS panel. For modification to theMS-FEU1610-0U, consult with ADI before you return the controller to the ADI factory.

On some jobs, you may encounter a fire system that consists of a third-party fire alarm system and aMetasys buildingautomation system with our UL Listed FSCS. Each system operates on a stand-alone basis. The third-party firealarm system is the primary fire annunciation station. The Metasys smoke control system is the secondary fireannunciation station that executes HVAC smoke control commands, and is also responsible for building control.



NAE Requirements

Alarm RepositoryThe smoke control NAE must not overwrite the initial smoke event that initiated the smoke control sequence. Thisrequirement applies to all NAEs that are UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed.

Refer to the Required Smoke Control Site Object and Smoke Control NAE Settings section in the Metasys SystemUL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Standard Smoke Control Applications Application Note(LIT-12012544) for details on these settings.

Metasys System Smoke Control System Overview

Smoke Control Application ExamplesTo help design a smoke control system, Figure 6 and Figure 7 show examples that comply with the UL 864UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing, incorporating smoke control and non-smoke control systems.These figures are examples; the actual number and arrangement of components in your system may differ. Ensurethat your system complies with all UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control device and communicationrequirements and restrictions.

Figure 6 shows the smoke control supervisory layer, while Figure 7 shows the field controller layer.


Figure 6: Metasys System Smoke Control System Main Communication Details


Figure 7: Metasys System Smoke Control System FC Bus Connection Details


Overview of HVAC Smoke Control System Types

Central SystemsCentral HVAC systems are frequently employed in smoke control designs. With this type, you need to ensure thatthe system’s capacity is sufficient to supply the quantity of outdoor air necessary to pressurize the areas adjacentto any fire area. Also make sure that the fan systems can handle situations where a fire may expand to other areas,requiring more areas to be positively pressurized. In addition, you must install smoke dampers at the duct risers ofeach floor’s supply and return takeoffs as required by NFPA 92A. Employ pressure controls to avoid rupturing orcollapsing the ductwork.

Dedicated Smoke Control SystemsDedicated smoke control systems are fan, damper, and duct systems designed for the sole purpose of controllingsmoke within a building. An example of a dedicated system is a stairwell or elevator shaft pressurization system thatis operational only during a smoke control event. The dedicated smoke control systems form a system of air movementthat is separate and distinct from the building’s HVAC system, and they only operate to control the flow of smoke.With their function being dedicated to the performance of smoke control, dedicated smoke control systems are moreimmune to faults in the building’s HVAC system.

Note: To ensure full performance and maintain UL/cUL compliance, apply automatic weekly testing to all dedicatedsystems, including dedicated elevator shaft fans and dampers used exclusively for smoke control. Refer totheMetasys System UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Standard Smoke Control ApplicationsApplication Note (LIT-12012544) for details on how to perform the necessary tests. Any failure to properlyrespond in the allotted time must send a trouble signal to the FSCS.

Non-Dedicated Smoke Control SystemsNon-dedicated smoke control systems share components with other air moving equipment normally used for buildingenvironmental control. When the smoke control mode is activated, the operating mode of the building’s HVACequipment changes in order to accomplish the objectives of the smoke control design. Non-dedicated systems tendto be less costly and occupy less space. However, from an operational standpoint, the control strategy becomesmore elaborate. This strategy may expand the number of control and monitoring points connected to a BuildingAutomation System (BAS) and increase the complexity of the sequence of operation of the air moving equipment.

Individual Floor Fan UnitsIf sufficient outdoor air is available and the system has the capability to exhaust an area, you may use individual orfloor-by-floor fan units in smoke control applications.

Fan Coil Units/Water Source Heat PumpsThese types of units are generally located on the perimeters of buildings and draw only enough outdoor air to fulfillthe fresh air requirements of the spaces they serve. The units are used in conjunction with central systems, whichdeliver fresh air and exhaust-recirculated air in larger quantities. When the fan coil unit is not located in the smokezone, you can exclude it from the smoke control sequence. When the unit serves the smoke zone in a design thatcalls for the area to be negatively pressurized, its outdoor air damper is closed, and the unit is de-energized.

Induction UnitsDuring a smoke control mode, induction units that serve the smoke zone are shut down, or their primary air sourceis closed off.


Variable Air Volume (VAV) SystemsThe Variable Air Volume (VAV) system, when employed as part of a smoke control strategy, is a subset of the CentralSystem category described previously. Employ control strategies that ensure adequate quantities of air pass throughthe terminal units to permit floor pressurization in the areas adjacent to the smoke zone. This may include overridingthe air volume control to provide maximum deliverable air to the areas adjacent to the fire area. If fan-poweredterminal units are used and installed in the smoke zone, shut off their fans. If bypass dampers fulfill the volumecontrol, close the damper during smoke control mode.

Smoke DampersAll dampers used as barriers in smoke partitions or as safety dampers in a smoke control system must be UL listedand classified for use in that application. Refer to UL 555S Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in SmokeControl Systems.

Design ConsiderationsThis section outlines the design criteria to consider when you implement a smoke control strategy.

Smoke MovementIn general, the movement of smoke follows the same pattern as the overall air movement within a building. Themajor influences on smokemovement include stack effect, air/smoke buoyancy, air/smoke expansion, wind, pressure,and the operating HVAC system. In a fire situation, a combination of these influences usually causes smokemovement.

An accepted way of containing smoke within a compartment or an area is to create pressure differences acrosspartitions that separate the affected area from the surrounding areas. You can accomplish this effect by creatinghigher pressure in the adjacent space than the pressure that is in the smoke zone. The pressure differential shouldbe sufficient to overcome the effects of wind pressure, stack effect, buoyancy of hot gases, and other influences,yet permit doors leading to emergency exit routes to be opened.

In addition, airflow can minimize the movement of smoke through openings such as doors. For example, you canpressurize a stairwell, thereby minimizing the migration of smoke into the stairwell. Should one of the stairwell doorsopen, the flow of fresh air from the stairwell reduces the movement of smoke into the affected area.

Note: Depending on the building design, you may treat elevator shafts like stairwells and positively pressurize themto prevent vertical migration of smoke through the building. You may close inter-floor and inter-area ductwork not being used for active smoke control at the appropriate locations, as detailed. Refer to the MetasysSystem UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Standard Smoke Control Applications ApplicationNote (LIT-12012544).

Smoke Control StrategiesThe smoke alarm initiation of an automatic smoke detection device, such as an area-type smoke detector locatedin one of the facility’s smoke zones, generally activates the smoke control system. This activation may initiate acontrol strategy for the air moving equipment to create higher pressures in the areas surrounding the smoke zonethan are present in the smoke zone. This may include positively pressurizing areas adjacent to the smoke zone ornegatively pressurizing the smoke zone and exhausting air from the smoke zone. Subsequent smoke alarm conditionsin other zones must be prevented from automatically changing the initial smoke control sequence. When you planthe smoke control strategy, follow the smoke control sequence of operations that the specifying engineer provides,and keep in mind the guidelines provided in this section.


Do not use duct type smoke detectors exclusively to activate smoke control, for the following reasons:

• The dilution of air in the duct system likely results in a slow response time.• The supply air duct detector, when exposed to outdoor air in the HVAC supply air duct, may report a false alarm

condition.• The duct system may move smoke from the smoke zone, which causes the duct detector in the return/exhaust

duct of the non-dedicated fan system to register an alarm condition.

Note: It may be acceptable to use a duct smoke detector if it is not exposed to outdoor air, the duct detector’scoverage area is equal to the area covered by a spot type area smoke detector (typically 900 square feet orless), or the AHJ has approved the application.

Initiating DevicesThe following section describes initiating devices for manual and automatic initiation.

Manual InitiationDo not use manual pull stations to initiate a smoke control sequence, since there is no certainty that manual devicesare activated in the area of involvement. However, you can use manual pull stations to initiate global operations,such as energizing stairwell and elevator shaft pressurization fans.

Manual implementation of the smoke control strategy takes place at the FSCS. The FSCS must be capable ofoverriding, either partially or in full, any automatic activation that may be in progress. It must also be capable ofmanually controlling each control point (damper, HVAC fan, and so forth) that is used for smoke control in the facility.Refer to theMetasys SystemUL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ ORD-C100-13 UUKLCStandard Smoke Control ApplicationsApplication Note (LIT-12012544) for details on how to integrate an FSCS into a Metasys system.

Interface devices (those that interface field points to the controller) have the following restrictions. They must:

• be listed for use in the Johnson Controls Smoke Control Listing, UL File S4977, Volume 13.• be used and installed according to Johnson Controls Metasys literature.• result in fan operation at the desired state within 60 seconds (plus 90 seconds to annunciate) when commanded.• result in completion of damper travel within 75 seconds (plus 90 seconds to annunciate) when commanded.

Automatic InitiationInitiation of an automatic operation of a smoke control sequence is accomplished by using a third-party UL/cULUOJZ Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel. You may use one of the following connection methods:

• Hard-wired dry contact connection to binary inputs on Johnson Controls Metasys-listed smoke control devices.• Ethernet connection using third-party UL/cUL UOJZ listed BACnet®/IP gateway.

Figure 8 shows a third-party Fire Alarm Control Panel used in a smoke control system. You can use any UL/cULUOJZ Listed FACPmanufactured by a third-party company. Also refer to theMetasys System Extended ArchitectureFire System Integration Using the IFC BACnet Gateway Application Note (LIT-1201993) for more information.


Figure 8: Fire Alarm Control Panel Inputs

End-to-End VerificationEnd-to-end verification is required to ensure that the smoke control sequence of operation has been implemented.Verification must be accomplished by using damper position indicators and airflow switches or differential pressuresensors. If the equipment fails to respond (or respond inappropriately) to commands from theMetasys smoke controlsystem, the FSCSmust generate an audible and visual trouble signal. For HVAC dampers, used in smoke controlsequences, the FSCS must display a positive indication of the damper’s fully opened position and its fully closedposition and must report a trouble condition if the damper position does not agree with the commanded position.For a permanent record of trouble conditions, including situations where the commanded smoke control sequencedoes not equal condition, use the audit trail function in the Metasys Site Management Portal to record the lastcommands and events during a smoke control sequence.

Fan Relay SupervisionIf the project must meet NFPA 101 Life Safety Code requirements (where the fire system uses the HVAC systemto sequence control or shut down an HVAC fan), then fan relay supervision is required. Locate the auxiliary relayused to control the motor starter on the HVAC system fan within 3 ft (0.91 m) of the motor starter. You must monitorthe wiring between the fan shutdown controller and the shutdown relay for integrity (supervised). This can beaccomplished by using electronic supervision or continuously powered shutdown relays that turn the fan off if poweris lost to the relay circuit. In addition, proof of fan operation, such as a duct-mounted airflow switch, is required.

Response TimesResponse times for individual components to achieve their intended state from the point of command should notexceed the following time periods: 60 seconds for fan operation at the intended state plus 90 seconds to annunciate;75 seconds for completion of damper travel plus 90 seconds to annunciate. See Figure 9 through Figure 15 forexamples of response times and timing order.


Communication TimingFigure 9: Communication Timing


Automatic Fan Command TimingFigure 10: Automatic Fan Command Timing


Manual Fan Command TimingFigure 11: Manual Fan Command Timing


Weekly Dedicated Fan Test TimingFigure 12: Weekly Dedicated Fan Test Timing


Automatic Damper Command TimingFigure 13: Automatic Damper Command Timing


Manual Damper Command TimingFigure 14: Manual Damper Command Timing


Weekly Dedicated Damper Test TimingFigure 15: Weekly Dedicated Damper Test Timing


Fire Alarm Annunciation PanelsFire alarm annunciation panels of varying configurations are available from many different manufacturers, includingJohnson Controls and Simplex. Depending on the manufacturer of the fire alarm system that interfaces to the JohnsonControls UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC smoke control system, youmay need to order a separateelectronics card for a BACnet gateway. The BACnet gateway offering varies with different fire alarm systems. Referto the Metasys System Extended Architecture Fire System Integration Using the IFC BACnet Gateway ApplicationNote (LIT-1201993) for more information.

IFC2-640The IFC2-640 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel is part of the Fire Alarm Controls. As a stand-alonesmall-to-large system or as part of a large network, the product meet virtually every application requirement. Designedwith modularity and for ease of system planning, the IFC2-640 can be configured with just a few devices for smallbuilding applications or for a large campus or high-rise application. Add additional peripheral equipment to suit theapplication, such as an electronics card for a BACnet gateway.

Figure 16: IFC2-640 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel


IFC2-3030The IFC2-3030 is an intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel designed for medium- to large-scale facilities. Fire emergencydetection and evacuation are critical to life safety, and the IFC2-3030 is ideally suited for these applications.

Figure 17: IFC2-3030 Fire Alarm Annunciation Panel


IFC-320The IFC-320 is designed to bring sophistication and superior performance to smaller applications. Auto-programmingfeatures allow fire protection to be established in seconds. Additional programming is quick and easy, and patentedtechnology makes the IFC-320 exceed worldwide code requirements for response time.

Figure 18: IFC-320 Fire Alarm Annunciation Panel


Simplex 4100ES Fire Alarm Control PanelSimplex 4100ES addressable fire alarm control panel supports up to 2,500 addressable points, fire alarm andemergency voice communications, and peer-to-peer networking operation. With its scalable design flexibility, 4100ESpanels are ideal for medium to large facilities and multi-building campus style networks. All Simplex addressablepanels rely on TrueAlarm addressable detectors.

Figure 19: Simplex 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel


Surge Protection Devices

Ethernet Surge ProtectionTo meet the UL 864 10th Edition Listing, surge protection devices are required on the Ethernet network, so that if apower surge occurs, the surge protector disconnects protected equipment from the power supply, ensuring thepower surge does not reach or damage the equipment.

American Power Conversion (APC) PNET1GB Ethernet Surge ProtectorThe APC PNET1GB surge protector (Figure 20) provides fail safe, stand-alone data-line surge suppression andprotection for Ethernet networks, telecommunication devices, and computer systems. One APC PNET1GB surgeprotector is required at both Ethernet cable ends of all Ethernet connections. If a power surge occurs, the APCPNET1GB surge protector disconnects protected equipment from the power supply, ensuring the power surge doesnot reach or damage the equipment. The APC PNET1GB surge protector ships factory-installed in a Johnson Controlsapproved smoke control enclosure.

Note: For the most up-to-date information on the APC PNET1GB Surge Protector, refer to the APC Web site athttp://www.apc.com.

Figure 20: APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protector

See the wiring sections of each Ethernet device for proper wiring connections.

Important: Details for device mounting are included in this document because it is required by UL/cUL. All smokelisted enclosures are ordered through Johnson Controls and device mounting is completed at thefactory. Do not field-mount or alter the mounting of any device installed in a Johnson Controls approvedsmoke listed enclosure. The only exceptions to field mounting are the VAV box controller and MetalOxide Varistors (MOV) kits (SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP and SMK-MOVKIT-BRD). See VAV Box Enclosuresand Communication Bus and Field Controller I/O Transient Protection for more information.

Safety Precautions• Turn off power to all equipment to be protected prior to installing the surge protector.• Use the surge protector only for Ethernet and token ring interface cards, switches, and other LAN equipment.• Do not install surge protector during a lightning storm. Install in a cool and dry indoor environment.


http://www.apc.com

• Connect the surge protector to earth ground (requirement).• Turn off electricity to the outlet to prevent electric shock when installing the ground wire to the electrical power

outlet ground. From the electrical panel, switch off the appropriate circuit breaker or remove the fuse for thatcircuit or outlet.

Installation

Risk of Electric Shock. Disconnect the power supply before making electrical connections to avoid electric shock.

Use the following steps and Figure 21 to install the PNET1GB surge protector.

1. Verify all hardware installation and software configuration prior to installing the surge protector. Verify that thesystem functions correctly with the existing network line.

2. Switch off power to the equipment to be protected (1).3. Disconnect the existing network cable (2) from the equipment to be protected.4. Connect the network cable to the input jack (6) on the surge protector.5. Connect one end of the supplied 6-inch patch cable (5) (or use any standard 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet cable)

to the output jack (4) on the surge protector. The jack is labeled on the surge protector with a circle and arrow.6. Connect the other end of the patch cable (5) to the input jack (3) on the network equipment (1) to be protected.7. Connect the green/yellow ground wire (7) to ground.

Figure 21: APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protector Installation

Notes:

• To fully protect your system, you must properly ground all surge protectors. If your electrical system is a 2-wirenon-grounded system, the PNET1GB may be left ungrounded. However, if the surge protector ground wire isnot connected to earth ground, the longitudinal (line to ground) surge protection is rendered ineffective.

• Connect the APC PNET1GB surge protector as closely as possible to the device. Mount the surge protector asshown in Figure 22.


Figure 22: APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient Protector Mounting Details

SpecificationsTable 3: APC PNET1GB Surge Protector Specifications

SpecificationsCategory6.50 kAPeak Current Normal Mode250 A Maximum with 8 x 20 μs waveformPeak Surge Current±4,000 V with 1.2 x 50 μs waveformPeak Voltage60 VDC NominalBreakover Voltage1 nsNM Surge Response TimeRJ45 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet protectionDataline protection1Data Lines Protected<60Let Through Voltage Rating32–120°F (0–49°C)Nominal Operating Temperature93%, NoncondensingRelative HumidityPin #1–8 (on Pin 8 Modular Jack)Lines Protected4.10 x 1.87 x 1.10 in. (10.4 x 4.7 x 2.8 cm)Dimensions (H x W x D)0.11 lb (0.05 kg)Net WeightCompliant with IEEE 802.3, 802.5, 802.12 Ethernet standard, Category 5, 6Standard ComplianceUL 497B

UL 1449 TVSS Rating 330 V

Compliance

UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels are not required for the APC PNET1GB surge protector.


Power Surge ProtectionThe Tripp Lite® ISOBAR8ULTRA, ISOBAR12ULTRA, and ISOBAR Euro4 Surge Protectors offer premium surgeand noise suppression devices prevent equipment damage and performance problems resulting from damagingtransient surges and line noise.

Note: For current information on the Isobar surge protectors, refer to the Tripp Lite Web site athttp://www.tripplite.com.

Tripp Lite ISOBAR8ULTRA 8-Outlet Surge ProtectorThe Tripp Lite ISOBAR8ULTRA Isobar® 8-Outlet Surge Protector (Figure 23) features robust surge suppressioncircuits. The unit has sine-wave tracking to offer extreme levels of protection against the heaviest surge conditionsexceeding IEEE 587 Category A & B specifications and reducing 6,000 V test surges to harmless levels under 35volts. The unique Isobar protection system combines large torroidal chokes, ferrite rod-core inductors, HighFrequency/Very High Frequency (HF/VHF) capacitors and multiple layers of metal oxide varistors into exclusiveisolated filter banks that remove Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI), even noisegenerated by other pieces of connected equipment. ISOBAR8ULTRA offers eight outlets arranged in four filter banksto prevent system crashes, reboots, and performance problems common as noisy system peripherals are poweredoff and on.

Surge suppression rated at 3,840 joules (97,000 A) offers network-grade protection. The widely spaced NEMA 5-15outlets accommodate up to four large transformer plugs without blocking outlets. The diagnostic LEDs confirm poweravailability, line fault, and protection status. The device includes a 12 ft (3.66 m) AC line cord with space-savingangled input plug and keyhole mounting tabs.

Note: The Tripp Lite ISOBAR8ULTRA Surge Protector is configured and installed in a smoke listed panel at thefactory.

Figure 23: Tripp Lite ISOBAR8ULTRA Surge Protector

SpecificationsTable 4: Tripp Lite ISOBAR8ULTRA Surge Protector Specifications

SpecificationCategory120 VACVoltage Compatibility60 HzFrequency Compatibility12 AOutput Volt A Capacity1,440 wattsOutput Watt Capacity8 NEMA 5-15R output receptacles, high-quality duplex styleOutlet Quantity / TypeSupports up to 4 large transformer plug accessories without coveringremaining outlets

Transformer Accommodation

NEMA 5-15P input plugInput Connection Type12 ft (3.7 m)Input Cord Length120 V 15 ARecommended Electrical Service


http://www.tripplite.com

Table 4: Tripp Lite ISOBAR8ULTRA Surge Protector SpecificationsSpecificationCategoryPROTECTION PRESENT (green)

LINE FAULT (red)

LINE OK (green)

Diagnostic LEDs

Two-position red illuminated on/off power switchSwitchesIncludes full normal mode (H-N) and common mode (N-G / H-G) line surgesuppression

Protection Modes

2,350 joulesAC Suppression Joule Rating140 VClamping Voltage (RMS)NM = 0 ns, CM = <1 nsAC Suppression Response Time97,000 A (36,000 NM / 61,000 CM)AC Suppression Surge Current RatingMetal oxide varistors, toroidal balanced chokes, ferrite rod-core inductorsand VHF capacitors.

AC Suppression Components Used

Prevents unsafe conditions during extreme extended over voltages andcatastrophic occurrences.

Safe Thermal Using

330V - UL VerifiedUL1499 Let Through RatingLess than 35 voltsIEEE587 Cat. A Ringwave Let Through40-80 dBEMI / RFI Filtering4.6 lb (2.1 kg)Unit Weight2.5 x 9 x 3.5 in. (6.4 x 22.9 x 8.9 cm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)UL 1449 (UR status) 1998 Rev. (AC Suppression)ComplianceUL 1283 (EMI Filter)

UL 1363 (EMI Filter)

cUL / CSA (Canada)

Exceeds IEEE 587 category A&B specifications

UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels are not required for this product.

Tripp Lite ISOBAR12ULTRA 12-Outlet Surge ProtectorThe Tripp Lite ISOBAR12ULTRA Isobar® 12-Outlet Surge Protector (Figure 24) offers network-grade surge andnoise suppression in a versatile all-metal multi-mount cabinet. Detachable mounting flanges are configurable forrack mount. The surge suppressor uses only one rack space (1U) when installed in any 19-inch EIA standard rack.It features the highest level of AC surge and EMI/RFI noise suppression of all Tripp Lite rackmount surge suppressors.The outlets are arranged in exclusive isolated filter banks to limit noise interaction among connected items. TheISOBAR12ULTRA includes 12 outlets (2 front / 10 rear), a 15-ft AC power cord, and a guarded power switch toreduce the risk of accidental shutoff. Diagnostic LEDs indicate AC present, line fault, and protection status.


Figure 24: Tripp Lite ISOBAR12ULTRA Surge Protector

SpecificationsTable 5: Tripp Lite ISOBAR12ULTRA Surge Protector Specifications

SpecificationCategory120 VACVoltage Compatibility

60 HzFrequency Compatibility

15 AOutput Volt A Capacity

1,800 wattsOutput Watt Capacity

12 NEMA 5-15R output duplex style receptacles, 2 front / 10 rearOutlet Quantity / Type

Supports up to 4 large transformer plug accessories without coveringremaining outlets


NEMA 5-15P input plugInput Connection Type

15 ft (4.6 m)Input Cord Length

120 V 15 ARecommended Electrical Service

PROTECTION PRESENT (green) LINE FAULT (red) LINE OK (green)Diagnostic LEDs

Two-position red illuminated on/off power switch to all outletsSwitches

Includes full normal mode (H-N) and common mode (N-G / H-G) line surgesuppression

Protection Modes

1,280 joulesAC Suppression Joule Rating

140 VClamping Voltage (RMS)

NM = 0 ns, CM = <1 nsAC Suppression Response Time

96,000 AAC Suppression Surge Current Rating

Metal oxide varistors, toroidal balanced chokes, and VHF capacitors.AC Suppression Components Used

Prevents unsafe conditions during extreme extended over voltages andcatastrophic occurrences

Safe Thermal Fusing

330V - UL VerifiedUL1499 Let Through Rating

40-80 dBEMI / RFI Filtering

4.6 lb (2.1 kg)Unit Weight

2.5 x 9 x 3.5 in. (6.4 x 22.9 x 8.9 cm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)

UL1449 (UR status) 1998 Rev. (AC Suppression)Compliance

UL 1283 (EMI Filter)

cUL / CSA (Canada)

Exceeds IEEE 587 category A&B specifications


UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels are not required for this product. The Tripp Lite ISOBAR12ULTRA Surge Protector is rackmountonly in an IDF closet and does not require housing in an enclosure.

Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO-4 4-Outlet Surge ProtectorThe Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO-4 Isobar® 4-Outlet Surge Protector (Figure 25) features robust surge suppressioncircuits. The unit has sine-wave tracking to offer extreme levels of protection against the heaviest surge conditionsexceeding IEEE 587 Category A & B specifications and reducing 6,000 V test surges to harmless levels under 35volts. The unique Isobar protection system combines large torroidal chokes, ferrite rod-core inductors, HighFrequency/Very High Frequency (HF/VHF) capacitors and multiple layers of metal oxide varistors into exclusiveisolated filter banks that remove Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI), even noisegenerated by other pieces of connected equipment. The ISOBAR Euro4 offers four outlets arranged in two filterbanks to prevent system crashes, reboots, and performance problems common as noisy system peripherals arepowered off and on.

Surge suppression rated at 680 joules (15,000 A) offers network-grade protection. The widely spaced NEMA 5-15outlets accommodate up to two large transformer plugs without blocking outlets. The diagnostic LEDs confirm poweravailability, line fault, and protection status. The device includes a 12 ft (3.66 m) AC line cord with space-savingangled input plug and keyhole mounting tabs. The inlet connection accepts a variety of cord sets to match countyor site-specific wall receptacles.

Note: The Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO-4 Surge Protector is configured and installed in a smoke listed panel at thefactory.

Figure 25: Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO-4 Surge Protector


SpecificationsTable 6: Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO-4 Surge Protector Specifications

SpecificationCategory230 VACVoltage Compatibility

60 HzFrequency Compatibility

10 AOutput Volt A Capacity

1,800 wattsOutput Watt Capacity

4 C13 to C14 outlet receptaclesOutlet Quantity / Type

Supports up to 2 large transformer plug accessories without coveringremaining outlets


IEC-C14 inlet connection accepts a variety of cord sets to match county orsite-specific wall receptacles

Input Connection Type

6 ft (2.0 m), detachableInput Cord Length

220-240 VAC 15 ARecommended Electrical Service

Two-position illuminated on/off power switchSwitches

Includes full normal mode (H-N) and common mode (N-G / H-G) line surgesuppression

Protection Modes

330 joulesAC Suppression Joule Rating

300Clamping Voltage (RMS)

NM = 0 ns, CM = <1 nsAC Suppression Response Time

15,000 AAC Suppression Surge Current Rating

Metal oxide varistors, toroidal balanced chokes, ferrite rod-core inductors,and VHF capacitors.

AC Suppression Components Used

1.8 lb (.8 kg)Unit Weight

3.5 x 7 x 2.5 in. (8.9 x 17.8 x 8.35 cm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)

Conforms to IEE 587 / ANSI C62.41Compliance

CE, TUV

UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels are not required for this product. The Tripp Lite ISOBAR Euro4 Surge Protector is rackmountonly in an IDF closet and does not require housing in an enclosure.

Communication Bus and Field Controller I/O Transient ProtectionThe UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing states that any field I/O wire from monitored orcontrolled equipment that leaves the room in which the controller is mounted requires transient protection. Wiringthat remains in the same room does not require transient protection. The system must be able to withstand signalline transient of 2400 volts and energy levels not less than 0.03 joule or greater than 1.2 joules. Two kits are availableto provide the required transient protection: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP and SMK-MOVKIT-BRD. Follow the informationin the next several sections to apply transient protection to field equipment.


Table 7: Transient Protection Devices and Their UsesApplicationProduct Code NumberMS/TP FC Bus terminations at Network Engines and Field ControllersSMK-MOVKIT-MSTPMS/TP FC Bus terminations at Network Engines and Field Controllers

Input/Output Wiring at Field Controllers

SMK-MOVKIT-BRD (I/O, bus)

TB1 and TB2 Terminal Blocks on N2 Bus and FC Bus RepeaterSMOKE-TRNKIT-0

SMOKE-TRNKIT-1UInput/Output Wiring at Field ControllersSMOKE-MOVKIT-0UInput/Output Wiring at DX-9120 Controller when NU-NET201-0 is installedSMOKE-MOV9120

SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection KitInstall an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protection kit for the MS/TP FC bus and Sensor Actuator (SA) buscommunication lines when the conduit run between enclosures does not remain in the same room.

Figure 26 shows an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP kit. The SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP kit contains one transient protection devicein each package. You must use this kit for smoke control listed VAV box controllers. For other controllers, you canthis kit or use the newer SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protection kit. See SMK-MOVKIT-BRD Transient ProtectionKit.

Figure 26: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit


Installation RequirementsTake care when installing transient protectors (MOV kits) in close proximity to the other protectors. Use the followingguidelines to install the MOV kit:

• Before installing the SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP kit into the MS/TP terminal block, twist it together with the field leadand insert it in the terminal block as one wire.

• Twist the wire tightly around the transient protection device a minimum of two turns before inserting it into theterminal block.

• When more than two wires must be placed under a single terminal screw, follow these steps:

1. Strip off 3/4 in. (19 mm) of insulation from all of the wires that you need to connect together.2. Add a single 6 in. (15.2 cm) length of #18 AWG pigtail wire with a minimum insulation thickness of 1/64 in.

(0.4 mm).3. Twist the wires together and ensure all the ends of the bare wires are equal in length.4. Inspect the connection to see that no bare copper is protruding out of the wire nut.5. Wrap the wire nut and a minimum of 1 in. (2.54 cm) of the wire bundle with an overlapping spiral of electrical

tape.6. Place the free end of the single 6 in. (15.2 cm) wire you inserted in Step 2 into the controller terminal and

tighten.

Transient Protection Kit PlacementFigure 27 shows wire runs to MS/TP equipment in cabinets of various rooms and the correct use of theSMK-MOVKIT-MSTP to protect the MS/TP devices from transients.


Figure 27: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit Placement


SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication TerminationsFigure 28 shows an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP kit wiring example when the wiring terminates at the MS/TP FC Busterminal block.

Figure 28: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP FC Bus Communication Wiring Terminations


Figure 29 shows the SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP wiring example for an FC Bus when the FC Bus communication wiringdoes not terminate at the MS/TP FC Bus terminal block.

Figure 29: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP FC Bus Communication Wiring Terminations - Multiple MS/TP Wires


SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Wiring for SA Bus Communication TerminationsFigure 30 shows an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP wiring example when the SA Bus communication wiring terminates at theMS/TP SA Bus terminal block.

Figure 30: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP SA Bus Communication Wiring Terminations


Figure 36 shows an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP wiring example for an SA Bus when the SA Bus communication wiringdoes not terminate at the MS/TP SA Bus terminal block.

Figure 31: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP SA Bus Wiring Terminations - Multiple MS/TP Wires

SpecificationsTable 8: SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP

ValueConditionsSymbolCategoryMax 30 VTA = 85 DegCVm(AC)Continuous RMS Voltage

Max 38 VTA = 85 DegCVm(DC)Continuous DC Voltage

8.8 J10/1000us, TA = 85 DegCWTMTransient Energy

1000 A8/20uS, TA = 85 DegCITMTransient Peak Current

Min 42 V, Max 52 VIT = 1mA, TA = 25 DegCVn(DC)Varistor Voltage

Max 93 VI Pk = 10A, 8/20Us, TA = 25 DegCVCClamping Voltage

Typ 4,500 pFf = 1MHZ, TA = 25 DegCfCapacitance


SMK-MOVKIT-BRD Transient Protection KitThe SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protection kit is available to protect the MS/TP FC Bus, SA Bus, and I/O wireswhen conduit between enclosures does not remain in the same room. This kit is composed of two printed circuitboards with built-in MOV transient protection (Figure 32), one with the communication bus interface (shown on left)and the other without the interface (shown on right). The board is installed in the same enclosure as the controller.Communication and I/O wiring from the controller is terminated to the appropriate terminals on the SMK-MOVKIT-BRDkit.

Figure 32: SMK-MOVKIT-BRD Transient Protection Kit

Installation RequirementsTake care when installing transient protectors (MOV kits) in close proximity to the other protectors. Use the followingguidelines to install the MOV board:

• Terminate the leads from the N2 Bus or MS/TP on the field controller to the FC/SA Bus terminal block on theMOVBRD kit.

• Terminate the leads from each input or output block on the field controller to the same numbered input or outputterminal block on the MOVBRD kit.





tighten.

SMK-MOVKIT-BRD Wiring for MS/TP FC Bus Communication TerminationsFigure 33 shows an SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kit wiring example when the wiring terminates at the MS/TP FC Buscommunication terminal block.


Figure 33: SMK-MOVKIT-BRD MS/TP FC Bus Communication Wiring Terminations


Figure 34 shows the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD wiring example for an FC Bus when the FC Bus communication wiringdoes not terminate at the MS/TP FC Bus terminal block.

Figure 34: SMK-MOVKIT-BRD FC Bus Wiring Terminations - Multiple MS/TP Wires

SMK-MOVKIT-BRD Wiring for SA Bus Communication TerminationsFigure 35 shows an SMK-MOVKIT-BRD wiring example when the SA Bus communication wiring terminates at theMS/TP SA Bus terminal block.


Figure 35: SMK-MOVKIT-BRD SA Bus Communication Wiring Terminations


Figure 36 shows an SMK-MOVKIT-BRDwiring example for an SA Bus when the SA Bus communication wiring doesnot terminate at the MS/TP SA Bus terminal block.

Figure 36: SMK-MOVKIT-BRD SA Bus Wiring Terminations - Multiple MS/TP Wires

SpecificationsTable 9: SMK-MOVKIT-BRD

ValueConditionsSymbolCategoryMax 30 VTA = 85 DegCVm(AC)Continuous RMS VoltageMax 38 VTA = 85 DegCVm(DC)Continuous DC Voltage8.8 J10/1000us, TA = 85 DegCWTMTransient Energy1000 A8/20uS, TA = 85 DegCITMTransient Peak CurrentMin 42 V, Max 52 VIT = 1mA, TA = 25 DegCVn(DC)Varistor VoltageMax 93 VI Pk = 10A, 8/20Us, TA = 25

DegCVCClamping Voltage


SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Transorb Kit for Field Bus RepeaterThe N2 Bus Repeater and the MS/TP FC Bus Repeater require SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U transorbs on terminal blocksTB1 and TB2. This requirement applies to either the NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U model. TheSMOKE-TRNKIT-1U is a kit containing one transient suppressor (Figure 37). The SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U is UL/cULlisted for Smoke Control and Energy Management equipment.


Figure 37: SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U and a Single Transorb

Installation RequirementsTwo SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U transorbs, ordered separately, are required to protect the NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0URepeater: one for TB1 and one for TB2.

Install the SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U transorbs to terminal blocks TB1 and TB2 using the following procedure:

1. Starting with TB1 (far side), strip the FC bus wiring to 0.5 in. (12.7 mm).2. Twist the single wire side of the first transorb to the FC COM far side wire.3. Attach the twisted FC COM wires to the TB1 COM terminal.4. Twist the FC+ far side bus wire together with one wire from 2-wire end of the first transorb.5. Attach the twisted wires to the TB1 D+ terminal.6. Twist the FC- far side bus wire together with the remaining 2-wire from the first transorb.7. Attach the twisted wires to the TB1 D- terminal.8. Repeat the process for TB2 (near side).

SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Wiring for Communication Bus TerminationsThe SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U tranzorb has no polarity; you may connect either wire extending from the 2-wire end ofthe transorb kit to the D+ terminal, and the remaining wire is to be connected to the D- terminal of the repeater. TheN2 and MS/TP FC Bus wire colors may vary from the example in Figure 38.


Figure 38: SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Transorb Connections to NU-RPT101-1U Repeater

SpecificationsTable 10: SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U Specifications

SpecificationsCategory7.22 V Minimum

7.98 V MaximumBreakdown Voltage (V(BR)AT IT)

1

10 mATest Current (IT)

6.5 VStandoff Voltage (VWM)

400 µAMaximum Reverse Leakage (AT VWMID)

44.7 AMaximum Peak Pulse Current (IPPM)

11.2 VMaximum Clamping Voltage (AT IPPMVC)

5.0 mV/°CMaximum Temperature Coefficient (OF V(BR))

1 Pulse Test: tp 50 ms

Field Controller I/O Transient ProtectionThe N2 and MS/TP field device’s I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transientprotection kit installed when the conduit run between the controller’s enclosure and the N2 and MS/TP I/O fielddevice does not remain in the same room. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requirestransient protection.

Note: Wiring that runs between rooms or runs 20 feet or longer must be copper wire enclosed in conduit. Wiringthat runs between buildings must be fiber optic cable.

Figure 39 shows the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U transient protection kit for controller I/O terminals. The SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Ukit contains 10 MOVs in each package. You may also use the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protection kit, which isa circuit board containing a large bank of built-in MOVs (Figure 32).


Figure 39: SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U

Figure 40 shows wire runs to control and feedback equipment in various rooms and the correct use of transientprotection for the field controller I/O terminal wiring.


Figure 40: Controller I/O Requiring MOV Protection

For all field controller input terminals and output terminals requiring transient protection, you must place an MOV(from the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U kit) between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal,and I/O terminals of the controller. (Alternatively, terminate the I/O wires to the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kit that has built-inMOVs.) See the following sections:

• For FACs: See Transient Protection.• For FEUs/FECs: See Transient Protection.• For IOMs: See Transient Protection.• For VMA16s: See Transient Protection.


Installation RequirementsTake care when installing transient protectors (MOV kits) in close proximity to the other protectors. Use the followingguidelines to install the MOV kit:

• Before installing the MOV into the I/O terminal block, twist it together with the field lead and insert it in the terminalblock as one wire.

• Twist the wire tightly around the transient protection device a minimum of two turns before inserting it into theterminal block.





tighten.

Figure 41 shows the MS/TP controller I/O terminal block SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U connections using three MOVs fromthe SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U kit.

Figure 41: SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U MS/TP I/O Wiring Terminations (AI/UI)

Figure 42 shows the MS/TP Controller I/O terminal block to the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kit connections.


Figure 42: SMK-MOVKIT-BRD MS/TP I/O Wiring Terminations (AI/UI)

MOV PlacementRefer to the specific controller sections for tables that indicate the Input and Output MOV placements for eachcontroller for both the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD.

SpecificationsTable 11: SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U

ValueConditionsSymbolCategoryMaximum 30 VTA = 85 DegCVm(AC)Continuous RMS Voltage

Maximum 38 VTA = 85 DegCVm(DC)Continuous DC Voltage

8.8 J10/1000us, TA = 85 DegCWTMTransient Energy

1,000 A8/20uS, TA = 85 DegCITMTransient Peak Current

Minimum 42 V, Maximum 52 VIT = 1mA, TA = 25 DegCVn(DC)Varistor Violate

Maximum 93 VI Pk = 10A, 8/20Us, TA = 25DegC

VCClamping Voltage



Network Communications


Mise En Garde: Risque de décharge électrique: Débrancher l'alimentation avant de réaliser tout raccordementélectrique afin d'éviter tout risque de décharge électrique.

Risk of Property Damage. Do not run low voltage cable in the same conduit or wiring troughs with high voltagewires. Running low and high voltage wires in the same conduit or wiring troughs may damage the equipment orcause system malfunction.

Risk of Property Damage. Do not run network communication cables in the same conduit, raceway, or panel withany high voltage (greater than 30 VAC) wiring. Isolate all network wiring and all network devices from high-voltagewiring and equipment. Failure to isolate network wiring and network devices from high-voltage wiring and equipmentcan result in damage to network devices or poor network performance.

Risk of Property Damage.Do not apply power to the system before checking all wiring connections. Short circuitedor improperly connected wires may result in permanent damage to the equipment.

Mise En Garde: Risque de dégâts matériels: Ne pas mettre le système sous tension avant d'avoir vérifié tousles raccords de câblage. Des fils formant un court-circuit ou connectés de façon incorrecte risquent d'endommagerirrémédiablement l'équipement.

Important: Use copper conductors only. Make all wiring in accordance with local, national, and regional regulations.Do not exceed the electrical ratings for the devices on the Metasys network.

Important: Electrostatic discharge can damage controller components. Use proper electrostatic dischargeprecautions during installation, setup, and service to avoid damaging the controller.

Important: Always consult with the customer’s network IT department before installing Metasys Ethernetcomponents. Close coordination with the IT department is critical as other online systems may beaffected.

Important: Do not deform, bend, stretch, or staple Ethernet cables. Doing so can put your system at risk ofcommunication loss. Also, do not run Ethernet cables parallel to power cables or near noise inducingcomponents.

Table 12 lists the Ethernet network rules and guidelines to follow.


Table 12: Ethernet Network RulesRules/Maximum AllowedCategoryStar topology with network switchesGeneralMaximum of 500 devices can be connected to one site. The site can be amix of both smokelisted and non-smoke listed controllers, or all smoke listed controllers.1

Number of Devices (IP)

Solid unshielded twisted pair (CAT5, CAT5e, or CAT6 cable): 100 m (330 ft)

Stranded unshielded twisted pair (patch cable): 10 m (33 ft)

RG58A/U coax cable (for 10Base2 systems): 185 m (607 ft)

Plastic/glass fiber optic with external adapter: 2,000 m (6,600 ft)

Line Length and Type

For 10/100/1000 BaseT, no line terminators allowed.TerminationsAll Ethernet connections must have a PNET1GB surge suppressor at each end of theEthernet cable. The ground lead of the PNET1GBmust be connected to earth ground. SeeAmerican Power Conversion (APC) PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protector for additionalinformation and wiring details.

Surge Protection

1 Smoke control products are identified by product code numbers that end in -U or -xU. For example, MS-FEC1611-1U is listedfor smoke control, MS-FEC1611-1 is not listed for smoke control.

Copper Cable ConnectionsUse Ethernet cables for connections between RJ45 ports on switches, media converters, and Ethernet NetworkInterface Cards (NICs). Verify the copper cable connected to media converters does not leave the room in whichthe media converter is installed. Use an APC ProtectNet® (model PNET1GB) surge protector on each cable segmentto prevent electrical surges. You must mount the PNET1GB surge protectors in a Johnson Controls approved smokelisted enclosure. See Figure 21 for Ethernet surge protection details using the PNET1GB surge protector. Also seeTable 13, Figure 43, Figure 44, and Figure 45.

Table 13: Copper Cable ConnectionsMaximum SegmentDistance

Minimum SegmentDistance

Minimum Required CablePort Signaling and DataRate

100 m (328 ft)2.5 m (8.2 ft)RJ45, 4-pair UTP, Category 5,Copper

10BASE-T, 10 Mbps

100 m (328 ft)2.5 m (8.2 ft)RJ45, 4-pair UTP, Category 5,Copper

100BASE-Tx, 100 Mbps

100 m (328 ft)2.5 m (8.2 ft)RJ45, 4-pairUTP Category5e,Copper

1000BASE-T, 1 Gbps

Figure 43: Using RJ45 Style Connectors on Copper Cables


Figure 44: Ethernet Straight-Through Cable RJ45 Connector Pinouts

Figure 45: Ethernet Crossover Cable RJ45 Connector Pinouts

Fiber-Optic Cable ConnectionsUse fiber-optic cable that has the characteristics outlined in Table 14.

Table 14: Fiber-Optic Cable ConnectionsHalf-Duplex: MaximumSegment Distance

Full-Duplex: MaximumSegment Distance

Minimum Required CablePort Signaling and DataRate1

412 m (1,352 ft)2,000 m (6,562 ft)1,300 nm, multimode 50/125 or62.5, ST connectors

10BASE-FL, 10 Mbps

412 m (1,352 ft)2,000 m (6,562 ft)1,300 nm, multimode 50/125 or62.5, ST connectors

100BASE-FX, 100 Mbps

412 m (1,352 ft)15,000 m (49,213 ft)1,300 nm, single-mode 50/125,ST connectors

100BASE-FX, 100 Mbps

1 The CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT maximum attenuation for multimode is 13 db loss/2 km and the maximum attenuation for singlemode is 19 db/15 km for the fiber-optic connection.

ST Style ConnectorsFigure 46 shows how to terminate fiber optic lines.


Figure 46: Using ST Style Connectors on Fiber-Optic Lines

24-Port Ethernet Switches: Cisco Catalyst 2960 and Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0UNote: At Release 8.1, the Cisco® Catalyst® 2960 and Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U Copper Switches are no longer

available for ordering. The UL listing for the Cisco Catalyst 2960 switch available at Release 5.2 is maintainedand can be used in the Release 8.1 listing if you have purchased it through Johnson Controls for a UL 864Ninth Edition UUKL Release 5.2 job site. The UL listing for the Asante switch available at Release 4.1 ismaintained and may be used in the Release 8.1 listing if you have purchased it through Johnson Controlsfor a UL 864 Eighth Edition UUKL Release 4.1 job site.

The 24 ports on the Cisco Catalyst 2960 and Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U Copper Switches with RJ45 Connectorssupport 10/100/1000 Mbps and automatically detect the communication speed, allowing any of the ports to be usedfor a 100 Mbps uplink. The copper switches also automatically detect whether the communication is half duplex orfull duplex.

Figure 47: Cisco Catalyst 2960 Ethernet Switch


Figure 48: Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U Copper Switch

Important: The Cisco Catalyst 2960 and Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U Copper Switch must be mounted in a JohnsonControls approved smoke listed enclosure with one APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protectiondevice on each used Ethernet connection. All devices are mounted at the Johnson Controls factoryand cannot be field mounted. Do not purchase the switch from a third-party vendor or install it in thefield.

WiringSee Copper Cable Connections for details on Ethernet copper connections.

SpecificationsTable 15: Cisco WS-C2960-24TC-S 24-Port Switch Specifications

Specifications1Category

24 x 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet portsFast Ethernet120 VAC, 1.3 A, 60 HzPower Rating16 GbpsForwarding Bandwidth32 MBFlash Memory6.5 mppsForwarding Rate32–120°F (0–49°C)Operating Temperature23–104°F (-5–40°C)Storage Temperature10–93% Non-condensingRelative Humidity1.73 x 17.7 x 9.52 in.(4.4 x 45 x 24.2 cm)Dimensions8 lb (3.6 kg)Weight

1 Technical specifications are subject to change without notice, per Cisco. For the most up-to-date information, refer to theCisco Web site at http://www.cisco.com.

Table 16: Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U 24-Port Ethernet Copper Switch SpecificationsSpecificationsCategory24 x 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet ports with Auto-Uplink: RJ-45 shielded connectorsFast EthernetIEEE Auto Negotiation (sets 10/100 Mbps speed and half/full duplex)Configuration


http://www.cisco.com

Table 16: Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U 24-Port Ethernet Copper Switch SpecificationsSpecificationsCategorySystem: Power

Per Port: 2 LEDs. Link (solid)/activity (blink).100 Mbps (on)/10 Mbps (off)

Status Indicators

Non-blocking, Fast Ethernet switchingEfficiencyTriple-chip design with onboard frame buffersSwitch ArchitectureFrames with errors (malformed PHY, runt < 64 bytes, CRC error, long > 1536) are discardedError Detection4K addressesForwarding MAC Table768 KB (total)On-Chip Buffer1.7 x 17.5 x 4.7 in (4.5 x 44.5 x 12.0 cm)Dimensions (H x W x D)4.0 lb (1.8 Kg)Weight120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.33 A MaximumPower32 to 120ºF (0º to 49ºC)Operating Temperature10 to 93%, noncondensingRelative HumidityIEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet over 2 pairs of UTP Category 5 (100BaseTX) IEEE 802.3Ethernet over 2 pairs of UTP Category 3 (10BaseT)

Standards Compliance

FCC Class AEmissions ComplianceUL, cUL, CE SafetyCompliance

UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels must be positioned as shown in Figure 49 and Figure 50.

Figure 49: UL/cUL Label Placement for the Cisco Catalyst 2960 Ethernet Switch (Release 5.2 Job Sites)

Figure 50: UL/cUL Label Placement for the Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U Ethernet Switch (Release 4.1 Job Sites)

24-Port Ethernet Switch: Cisco IE 4010-4S24PThe 24 ports on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet (IE) 4010-4S24P copper switch with RJ45 Connectors support10/100/1000 Mbps and automatically detect the communication speed, allowing any of the ports to be used for a100/1000 Mbps uplink. The switch has four additional uplink ports. The copper switch also automatically detectswhether the communication is half duplex or full duplex.


Figure 51: Cisco IE 4010-4S24P Ethernet Switch

Figure 52: Cisco IE 4010-4S245P Front and Back Views

Important: The Cisco IE 4010-4S24P copper switch with its power supply must be installed and mounted at thefactory in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure with proper surge protection and oneAPC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protection device on each used Ethernet connection. Do notpurchase the switch or power supply from a third-party vendor or install it in the field.


Notes:

• All inputs and outputs are rated as special application, power-limited, and supervised with trouble signal on theFSCS.

• As shown here, the Cisco IE 4010-4S24P switch requires a Cisco PWR-RGD-AC-DC-H power supply. This isa power supply that you screw into the back of the switch. Two slots are available, you can use either one.However, to be in compliance with the UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing,you can use only one of the two Cisco PWR-RGD-AC-DC-H power supply slots for the Cisco IE 4010-4S24Pswitch. You must leave the other slot empty. Power over Ethernet (PoE) cannot be enabled.


Figure 53: Cisco PWR-RGD-AC-DC-H Power Supply

SpecificationsTable 17: Cisco IE 4010-4S24P 24-Port Switch Specifications


24 x 10/100/1000 Mbps Copper PoE/PoE+ Ports

4 x 100/1000 Mbps Uplink Ports

Fast Ethernet Ports

100-240 VAC, 2.0 A, 60 HzPower RatingMaximum of 90W not including PoE consumptionPower Consumption28 Gbps (line rate/non-blocking)Forwarding Bandwidth128 MB onboard flash memory

1 GB removable SD flash memory card

Flash Memory

41.67 mpps with 64 byte packets (line rate for all ports and packet sizes)Forwarding RateAlarm I/O: four alarm inputs to detect dry contact open or closedAlarm Annunciation-40–167°F (-40–75°C)Operating Temperature-40–185°F (-40–85°C)Storage Temperature10–95% Non-condensingRelative Humidity1.75 x 17.5 x 14.0 in. (4.45 x 44.5 x 35.6 cm), 1 RU (rack unit) heightDimensions12.1 lbs (5.46 kg)Weight


Table 18: Cisco PWR-RGD-AC-DC-H Power Supply SpecificationsSpecifications1Category

100-120 VAC, 2.0 A, 60 Hz2Power Rating

Maximum of 80W not including PoE consumption

Note: PoE is not approved for this device for the UL/cUL 864 UUKL 10th Edition listing.

Power Consumption

18 gauge, 3-conductorRequired Power Cord-40–167°F (-40–74°C)Operating Temperature-40–185°F (-40–85°C)Storage Temperature5–95% Non-condensingRelative Humidity



Table 18: Cisco PWR-RGD-AC-DC-H Power Supply SpecificationsSpecifications1Category

1.58 x 7.0 x 5.0 in. (4.0 x 17.8 x 12.7 cm) without mounting flangesDimensions2.55 lbs (1.16 kg)Weight


2 This power specification applies to equipment as tested; factory spec may differ.

UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels must be positioned as shown in Figure 54.

Figure 54: UL/cUL Label Placement for Cisco IE 4010-4S24P Ethernet Switch (Rear View)

Figure 55: UL/cUL Label Placement for Cisco PWR-RGD-AC-DC-H Power Supply

16-Port Ethernet Switch: Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-EThe 16 ports on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet (IE) 4000-16T4G-E copper switch with RJ45 Connectors support10/100/1000 Mbps and automatically detect the communication speed, allowing any of the ports to be used for a100/1000 Mbps uplink. The switch has four additional uplink ports. The copper switch also automatically detectswhether the communication is half duplex or full duplex.



Figure 56: Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-E Ethernet Switch

Important: The Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-E copper switch and its power supply must be installed and mounted at thefactory in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure with proper surge protection and oneAPC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protection device on each used Ethernet connection. Do notpurchase the switch or power supply from a third-party vendor or install it in the field.


Notes:

• All inputs and outputs are rated as special application, power-limited, and supervised with trouble signal on theFSCS.

• The Cisco PWR-IE170W-PC-AC power supply, as shown below, is required for the Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-Eswitch.

Figure 57: Cisco PWR-IE170W-PC-AC Power Supply

SpecificationsTable 19: Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-E16-Port Switch Specifications


16 x 10/100/1000 Mbps Copper PoE/PoE+ Ports

4 x 100/1000 Mbps Uplink Ports

Fast Ethernet Ports

100-240 VAC, 2.0 A, 60 HzPower RatingMaximum of 90W not including PoE consumptionPower Consumption128 MB onboard flash memory

1 GB removable SD flash memory card

Flash Memory


Table 19: Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-E16-Port Switch SpecificationsSpecifications1Category

Line rate for all ports and packet sizesForwarding RateAlarm I/O: two alarm inputs to detect dry contact open or closedAlarm Annunciation-40–167°F (-40–75°C)Operating Temperature-40–185°F (-40–85°C)Storage Temperature10–95% Non-condensingRelative Humidity6.12 x 6.12 x 5.09 in. (155.4 x 155.4 x 129.2 mm)Dimensions6.35 pounds (2.88 kg)Weight


Table 20: Cisco PWR-IE170W-PC-AC Power Supply SpecificationsSpecifications1Category

100-120 VAC, 2.3 A, 60 Hz2Power Rating

170 WPower Consumption18 gauge, 3-conductorRequired Power Cord-40–167°F (-40–74°C)Operating Temperature-40–185°F (-40–85°C)Storage Temperature5–95% Non-condensingRelative Humidity5.93 x 3.72 x 5.60 in. (150.6 x 94.5 x 142.2 cm)Dimensions3.88 lbs (1.76 kg)Weight


2 This power specification applies to equipment as tested; factory spec may differ.

UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels must be positioned in the location shown in Figure 58.




Figure 58: UL/cUL Label Placement for Cisco IE 4000-16T4G-E Ethernet Switch

Figure 59: UL/cUL Label Placement for Cisco PWR-IE170W-PC-AC Power Supply (Top View)


5-Port Ethernet Switches: Contemporary Controls® CTRLink™ EISK5-100Tand Netgear FS105The five ports on the CTRLink™ EISK5-100T Copper Switch (Figure 60) and the Netgear® FS105 Copper Switch(Figure 61) with RJ45 Connectors support 10/100 Mbps and automatically detect the communication speed, allowingany of the ports to be used for the 100 Mbps uplink. The copper switches also automatically detect whether thecommunication is half duplex or full duplex.

Note: The Netgear FS105 Copper Switch is no longer available to order at Release 8.1; however, the smoke controllisting from Release 4.1 is maintained at Release 8.1. The Netgear FS105NA Copper Switch is not includedin the Release 4.1, Release 5.2, or Release 8.1 listing.

Figure 60: CTRLink EISK5-100T 5-Port Copper Switch


Figure 61: Netgear FS105 5-Port Copper Switch

Important: The CTRLink EISK5-100T or Netgear FS105 5-Port Copper Switch must be mounted in a JohnsonControls approved smoke listed enclosure with one APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protectiondevice on each used Ethernet connection and a 24 VAC power supply (PAN-PWRSP-U). All devicesare mounted at the Johnson Controls factory and cannot be field mounted. Do not purchase the switchor its power supply from a third-party vendor or install it in the field.


SpecificationsTable 21: CTRLink EISK5-100T 5-Port Ethernet Copper Switch

SpecificationsCategory24 VACVoltage.4 A, 3 W, 7 VAPower60 HzFrequency0–49°C (32–120°F)Operating Temperature-40–85°C (-40–185°F)Storage Temperature10–93% NoncondensingHumidityANSI/IEEE 802.3 at 10 or 100 Mbps; 10BASE-T or 100-BASE-TXCommunicationShielded RJ-45ConnectorsPower, Activity/Link, DuplexLEDsIP 30ProtectionTS-35 DIN RailMounting0.45 kg (1 lb)Weight100 x 70 x 26 mm (4 x 2-3/4 x 1 in.)Dimensions (H x W x D)North America: UL508 Industrial Control Equipment

Europe: CE Mark; CFR 47 Part 15, Class A

Compliance

Table 22: Netgear FS105 5-Port Ethernet Copper SwitchSpecificationsCategoryFive auto speed-sensing UTP portsNetwork Ports5 x 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet ports with Auto-Uplink: RJ-45 shielded connectorsFast EthernetIEEE Auto Negotiation (sets 10/100 Mbps speed and half/full duplex)ConfigurationLink, speed, and activity indicators built into each RJ-45 portStatus LEDsNon-blocking, Fast Ethernet switchingEfficiency


Table 22: Netgear FS105 5-Port Ethernet Copper SwitchSpecificationsCategoryTriple-chip design with onboard frame buffersSwitch ArchitectureFrames with errors (malformed PHY, runt < 64 bytes, CRC error, long > 1536) arediscarded

Error Detection

Store-and-forwardForwarding Modes64 KBBuffer Memory1 GbpsBandwidthLess than 20 µs for 64-byte frames in store-and-forward mode for 100 Mbps to 100 Mbpstransmission

Network Latency

1,000Address Database Size48-bit MAC addressAddressing3.7 x 4.1 x 1.1 in (9.4 x 10.3 x 2.7 cm)Dimensions (H x W x D)0.62 lb (0.28 kg)Weight7.5 W (7.5 VDC, 1A)AC Power32 to 120ºF (0 to 49ºC)Operating Temperature10 to 93%RH, noncondensingRelative HumidityIEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet

IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet

IEEE 802.3x Full-duplex Flow Control


CE mark, commercial

FCC part 15 Class A

EN55 022 (CISPR22), Class A

VCCI Class A

C-Tick

Electromagnetic EmissionsCompliance

UL listed (UL 1950)/cUL

IEC950/EN60950

ULC/ORD-C100-13

Safety Agency Compliance

UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels for the CTRLink Ethernet switch must be positioned as shown in Figure 62. The NetgearEthernet switch does not require UL/cUL labeling.


Figure 62: UL/cUL Label Placement for the EISK5-100T Ethernet Switch

8-Port Ethernet Switch: Contemporary Controls® CTRLink™ EIS8-100TThe eight ports on the Contemporary Controls®CTRLink™ EIS8-100T Copper Switch with RJ45 Connectors support10/100 Mbps and automatically detect the communication speed, allowing any of the ports to be used for a 100Mbps uplink. The switch also automatically detects whether the communication is half duplex or full duplex.


Figure 63: CTRLink EISK8-100T 8-Port Copper Switch

Important: The CTRLink EIS8-100T Copper Switch must be mounted in a Johnson Controls approved smokelisted enclosure with one APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protection device on each used Ethernetconnection and a 24 VAC power supply (PAN-PWRSP-U). All devices are mounted at the JohnsonControls factory and cannot be field mounted. Do not purchase the switch or its power supply from athird-party vendor or install it in the field.

Figure 64 shows the EIS8 circuit board with port jumpers in their default settings and the location of the internalLEDs. The internal LEDs indicate the status of each communication port.

Four jumpers are used for factory testing (JP1, JP2, JP3 - no jumper installed, JP4 - no jumper installed). Keep thejumpers in their default (or vacant) positions. Adjust all other jumpers as required according to Table 23.


Figure 64: EIS8 Circuit Board Jumper Locations

Flow Control Jumper OptionsTable 23 shows the Flow Control Jumper Options.

Table 23: Flow Control Jumper OptionsIf Set DownIf Set UpFunctionJumperDisabledEnabledPauseJP5DisabledEnabledBackpressureJP6Store-and-ForwardCut ThroughData ForwardingJP7DisabledEnabledBroadcast Storm ControlJP8

Internal LEDsTable 28 shows the internal LEDs: Half Duplex (HD), Full Duplex (FD) and Collision (C).

Table 24: Internal LEDs4321PortD23D22D21D20LEDTXTXTXTXSignalingHDHDHDHDIf ONFDFDFDFDIf OFFCCCCIf Flashing


The CTRLink EIS8 Copper/Fiber Switch must be mounted in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure(Figure 69) with four APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protection devices and a 24 VAC power supply(PAN-PWRSP-U). All devices are mounted at the Johnson Controls factory and cannot be field mounted.

Figure 65: EIS8-100T Mounted in an Enclosure

WiringSee Copper Cable Connections for details on Ethernet copper and fiber connections. All inputs and outputs arerated as special application, power-limited, and supervised with trouble signal on the FSCS.

SpecificationsTable 25: CTRLink™ EIS8-100T 8-Port Ethernet Copper Switch

SpecificationsCategoryEight auto speed-sensing UTP portsNetwork PortsIEEE Auto Negotiation (sets 10/100 Mbps speed)ConfigurationThe switch has a Power LED (green) and Loop Detect LED (red). Each RJ-45 port has aLink/Data LED (green) and Data Rate LED (yellow).

Status LEDs

Hoffman® A20N16BLP 20 x 16 x 8.62 Medium Type 1 EnclosureEnclosure RequirementsHoffman A20N16MPP NEMA 1, Perforated 17.00 x 14.50 sub panel, fits a 20 x 16 enclosure

7.54 x 1.75 x 5.45 in. (191 x 44 x 138 mm)Dimensions (H x W x D)2 lb (0.9 Kg)Weight5 VA (24 VAC, 400 mA), 60 HzAC Power1

32–120°F (0–49°C)Operating Temperature


Table 25: CTRLink™ EIS8-100T 8-Port Ethernet Copper SwitchSpecificationsCategory10 to 93% RH, noncondensingRelative HumidityANSI/IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet

ANSI/IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet



CE Mark:

Applied Council Directives -

89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC92/59/EEC

Standard to which conformity is declared -

EN 55022:1995 Class A

EN 55024:1998

FCC:

CFR part 15 Class A


UL listed:

UL 1604 9BA2

UL 508

UL864 Recognized UOXX2

ULC/ORD-C100-13


1 All inputs and outputs are rated as special application, power limited, and supervised with trouble signal on the FSCS.



Figure 66: UL/cUL Label Placement for the EIS8-100T Ethernet Switch

4-Port Ethernet Switch: Contemporary Controls CTRLink EIS6-100T/FTThe four Ethernet copper ports on the Contemporary Controls CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT Switch with RJ45 Connectorssupport 10/100 Mbps and automatically detect the communication speed, allowing any of the ports to be used for100 Mbps uplink. The switch also automatically detects whether the communication is half duplex or full duplex onthe RJ45 ports. The two fiber ports on the switch are 100BASE-FX. The half- or full-duplex mode is set by internaljumpers.


Figure 67: CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT 4-Port Copper Switch

Important: The CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT Copper Switch 4-Port Copper Switch must be mounted in a JohnsonControls approved smoke listed enclosure with one APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protectiondevice on each used Ethernet connection and a 24 VAC power supply (PAN-PWRSP-U). All devicesare mounted at the Johnson Controls factory and cannot be field mounted. Do not purchase the switchor its power supply from a third-party vendor or install it in the field.

Figure 68 shows the EIS6-100T/FT circuit board with the fiber port jumpers in their default settings, and the locationof the internal LEDs that indicate the status of each communication port. Five jumpers are used for factory testing(JP1, JP2, JP3 - no jumper installed, JP4 - no jumper installed). Leave the jumpers in their default or vacant positions.Adjust all other jumpers as required according to Table 26 and Table 27.


Figure 68: EIS6 Circuit Board Jumper Locations

Flow Jumper OptionsTable 26 shows the flow control jumper options.

Table 26: Flow Control Jumper OptionsIf Set DownIf Set UpFunctionJumperDisabledEnabledPauseJP5DisabledEnabledBackpressureJP6Store-and-ForwardCut ThroughData ForwardingJP7DisabledEnabledBroadcast Storm ControlJP8

Duplex Jumper Options - FiberTable 27 shows the duplex jumper options for fiber.

Table 27: Duplex Jumper Options - FiberIf Set RightIf Set LeftFunctionJumper1

Full-DuplexHalf-DuplexPort 5 Duplex OperationJP9Full-DuplexHalf-DuplexPort 5 Duplex OperationJP10Full-DuplexHalf-DuplexPort 6 Duplex OperationJP11Full-DuplexHalf-DuplexPort 6 Duplex OperationJP12

1 The positions of JP9 and JP10 must match. The positions of JP11 and JP12 must match.


Internal LEDsTable 28 shows the internal LEDs: Half Duplex (HD), Full Duplex (FD) and Collision (C).

Table 28: Internal LEDs4321PortD23D22D21D20LEDTXTXTXTXSignalingHDHDHDHDIf ONFDFDFDFDIf OFFCCCCIf Flashing

The CTRLink EIS6 Copper/Fiber Switch must be mounted in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure(Figure 69) with four APC PNET1GB Ethernet Transient protection devices and the 24 VAC power supply(PAN-PWRSP-U). All devices are mounted at the Johnson Controls factory and cannot be field mounted.

Figure 69: EIS6 Mounted in an Enclosure

WiringAll inputs and outputs are rated as special application, power-limited, and supervised with trouble signal on theFSCS.

Copper CablesSee Copper Cable Connections for details on Ethernet copper connections.


Fiber-Optic ConnectionsSee Fiber-Optic Cable Connections for more information on fiber-optic connections.

SpecificationsTable 29: CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT 4-Port Ethernet Copper/2-Port Fiber Port Switch

SpecificationsCategoryFour auto speed-sensing RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10/100 Mbps speed UTP portsNetwork PortsTwo Duplex ST Connector Fiber 100BASE-TX 100 Mbps Speed Ports

The switch has a Power LED (green) and Loop Detect LED (red). Each RJ-45 port andST Fiber Port have a Link/Data LED (green) and Data Rate LED (yellow).

Status LEDs

Hoffman® A20N16BLP 20 x 16 x 8.62 Medium Type 1 EnclosureEnclosure RequirementsHoffman A20N16MPP NEMA 1, Perforated 17.00 x 14.50 sub panel, fits a 20 x 16enclosure

7.54 x 1.75 x 5.45 in. (191 x 44 x 138 mm)Dimensions (H x W x D)2 lb (0.9 Kg)Weight5 VA (24 VAC, 400 mA), 60 Hz

Ethernet connection: 8.17 ohm line resistanceAC Power1

32–120°F (0–49°C)Operating Temperature10 to 93% RH, noncondensingRelative HumidityANSI/IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet

ANSI/IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet



CE Mark:

Applied Council Directives -

89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC92/59/EEC

Standard to which conformity is declared -

EN 55022:1995 Class A

EN 55024:1998

FCC:

CFR part 15 Class A


UL listed:

UL 1604 9BA2

UL 508

UL864 Recognized UOXX2

ULC/ORD-C100-13


1 All inputs and outputs are rated as special application, power limited, and supervised with trouble signal on the FSCS.



Figure 70: UL/cUL Label Placement for the EIS6-100T/FT Ethernet Switch

Single-Port Media Converter: Contemporary Controls® EIMK-100T/FTFollow these additional guidelines when installing the Contemporary Controls EIMK-100T/FT Media Converter:

• Keep copper cables in the same room as media converters. Use CAT5, CAT5e, or CAT6 copper cables withRJ45 connectors. Cables must be 20 ft (6 m) or less in length.

• Use an AC to DC power adapter to provide power to the media converters. Secure the power adapters in alocked enclosure with a UL/cUL Listed terminal strip.

• Install the fiber converter within the same enclosure as the connected controller when the fiber converter isinstalled outside of an IT equipment room.


Figure 71: EIMK-100T/FT Media Converter

Important: The EIMK-100T/FT Media Converter and its 24 VAC power supply (PAN-PWRSP-U) must be factorymounted in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure and cannot be field mounted. Do notpurchase the converter or its power supply from a third-party vendor or install it in the field.

Wiring

Ethernet Surge ProtectionSee Figure 21 for information on the PNET1GB Ethernet surge suppression.

Copper CablesSee Copper Cable Connections for details on copper connections.

Fiber-Optic ConnectionsSee Fiber-Optic Cable Connections for more information on fiber-optic connections.


Communication Wiring ExampleFigure 72 shows a application using fiber-optic cable and media converters. The following guidelines apply in thissystem:

• Install all fiber-optic lines and copper cables in conduit.• Verify that all fiber-optic lines with ST connectors have a maximum length of 6,560 feet (2,000 meters).• Verify that connections between a media converter and a Smoke Control supervisory controller have a maximum

length of 20 feet (6 meters) and that all cables are in the same room as the media converters.• Verify that all copper cables with RJ45 connectors are CAT5, CAT5e, or CAT6 twisted pair.


Figure 72: Smoke Control System - Fiber-Optic and Ethernet Communications


SpecificationsTable 30: EIMK-100T/FT Specifications

SpecificationsCategory24 VAC, .4 A, 4 VA, 60 HzPower Requirements0–49°C (32–120°F)Operating Temperature-40–85°C (-40–185°F)Storage Temperature10–93% noncondensingRelative HumidityIP30ProtectionDIN railMounting1 lb (0.45 kg)Shipping WeightIEEE 802.3 100 Mbps data rate

100BASE-TX using RJ-45 connectors (MDI and MDIX), 100 m maximum

100BASE-FX multimode using ST or SC connectors, 2 km maximum

Communications

Power, Link, ActivityLEDsCE Mark, CFR 47 Part 15 Class A; RoHS, UL 508 Industrial Control EquipmentCompliance

Table 31: Media Converter Fiber Optic Connector SpecificationsLinkBudget

Max InPWR

Sensitivity(dBm)Max TXPWR

Min TXPWR

TypicalDistance

Wavelength

FiberType

ConnectorType

13.5 dB-7.2 dBm-29.5 dBm-10.0 dBm-16.0 dBm2 km850 nm LEDMultimodeST



Figure 73: UL/cUL Label Placement for the EIMK-100T/FT Media Converter

See the manufacturer’s information packaged with each device for more device specifications.


Smoke Control Network Automation EnginesImportant: Be sure to keep your smoke listed engines up-to-date with the most recent Metasys software patches

approved for smoke control. For more information, see Software Patches.

Important: Smoke control engines have defined object count limits that cannot be exceeded without compromisingsystem function. NAE5510 engines can support up to 5,000 objects. If you exceed these object counts,you must add another engine to your system.

Use the smoke control NAE55s to interface all input and output smoke control points. An internal modem is notavailable for smoke control NAE55s.

Important: All smoke listed enclosures are ordered through Johnson Controls. Device mounting is completed atthe factory. Do not field-mount or alter the mounting of any device installed in a Johnson Controlsapproved smoke listed enclosure. Field-mounting or altering the mounting of any device installed in aJohnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure voids the UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13UUKLC listing.

Figure 74: Smoke Control NAE: (MS-NAE5510-1U, MS-NAE5510-2U, or MS-NAE5510-3U)

Device LayoutFigure 75 shows the dimensions and components of the NAE5510.


Figure 75: Smoke Control NAE MS-NAE5510-xU Dimensions, mm (in.)

Important: The unused USB ports and RS-232-C Serial Ports in Figure 75 are not UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC SmokeControl Listed. These ports are not approved for smoke control.

Power SupplyThe Smoke Control NAEs must be powered from either a PAN-PWRSP-U or a PAN-96VAXFR-U power supplytransformer. For additional information about the power supplies, see PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply andPAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply.

Wiring

Risk of Electric Shock: Disconnect the power supply before making electrical connections to avoid electric shock.


Risk of Property Damage:Do not apply power to the system before checking all wiring connections. Short circuitedor improperly connected wires may result in permanent damage to the equipment.



Important: Do not exceed the controller electrical ratings. Exceeding controller electrical ratings can result inpermanent damage to the controller and void any warranty.

Important: Use copper conductors only. Make all wiring in accordance with local, national, and regional regulations.

Important: Electrostatic discharge can damage controller components. Use proper electrostatic dischargeprecautions during installation, setup, and servicing to avoid damaging the controller.

Note: Do not run N2 Bus and field wiring in the same conduit as line-voltage wiring (30 VAC or higher) or nearwiring that switches power to highly inductive loads (such as contactors, coils, motors, or generators).

Power WiringConnect the 24 VAC supply power wires from the transformer to the removable three-terminal plug as shown inFigure 76. The middle terminal is not used.

Figure 76: 24 VAC Supply Power Wiring

Be sure to connect 24 VAC power in the same manner for all network devices so that transformer phasing is uniformacross the devices. Powering devices with uniform 24 VAC supply power phasing reduces noise, interference, andground loop problems. The NAE does not require an earth ground connection.

Disconnecting Power from the NAEImportant: Make sure that the data protection battery is installed and charged before disconnecting the 24 VAC

supply power from the NAE.

When 24 VAC supply power to an NAE is disconnected or lost, the NAE is non-operational, but the POWER LEDremains on and the data protection battery continues to power the NAE for up to 5 minutes while volatile data isbacked up to nonvolatile memory. The RUN LED goes off when data backup and shutdown are complete. SeeFigure 79.

Communication Bus WiringConnect the three MS/TP FC Bus or the three N2 Bus wires to the removable four-terminal plug as shown in Figure77 (labeled FC Bus).


Figure 77: MS/TP FC or N2 Bus Wiring

End-of-Line SwitchNAEs have an End-of-Line (EOL) switch that allows you to set the NAE as a network terminated device. NAEs areshipped with the EOL switch in the factory default, ON (up) position (Figure 78).

Figure 78: NAE End-of-Line Switch in the Factory Default ON (Up) Position

Performance and Testing Guidelines/Limitations for Network EnginesObserve the performance guidelines and limitations listed in Table 32.

Table 32: Performance and Testing Guidelines/LimitationsCommentSupportedDescriptionIncludes all points, extensions, graphics(background image), trend study, andother objects (for example, schedules andinterlock).

5,000Maximum number of items (objects) inone NAE55

Maximum is based on testing results fora combined system, UL 864 and UL 916.

500Maximum number of network engines

Wiring Considerations and Guidelines for Network IntegrationsObserve the wiring considerations and guidelines listed in Table 33.


Table 33: Guidelines for MS/TP (FC Bus) Network TopologyRules/Maximums AllowedCategoryTwo MS/TP (FC) Buses or two N2 Buses per NAE55 or one MS/TP (FC) Bus and one N2Bus per NAE55

Only daisy-chained devices

General

Number of Field DevicesSupported

NAE55 models support up to 100 devices on the field bus with one repeater between anNAE and any device and a maximum of 50 devices between repeaters.

Cable Length and Type 1,500 m (5,000 ft) twisted pair cable without a repeater

3,048 m (10,000 ft) twisted pair cable from an NAE and the farthest field device (twosegments of 1,500 m [5,000 ft] each, separated by a repeater)

2,000 m (6,600 ft) for optical fiber

Cable Wire Type and Size Solid or stranded 22 AWG recommended (24 AWG twisted pair or larger is acceptable)

Two FC/N2 Bus devices with EOL switches in the ON position, one at each end of eachFC Bus segment

Terminations

Observe the NAE Ethernet network rules listed in Table 34.

Table 34: NAE Ethernet Network RulesRules/Maximums AllowedCategoryPoint-to-point star topology with network switchesGeneralMaximum of 500 network engines may be connected to one site in the Metasyssystem.

Number of Devices

2,000 m (6,600 ft) for optical fiber

10/100 BaseT: 100 m (330 ft) CAT5/CAT5e or CAT6 cable

1000 BaseT:1 100 m (330 ft) CAT5/CAT5e or CAT6 cable

Line Length and Type

Terminations For 10/100/1000 BaseT, no line terminators allowed.

A PNET1GB transient protector is required at each end of every Ethernet connection.Transient Protection

1 MS-NAE5510-2U and MS-NAE5510-3U models only.

Powering On the NAEAfter applying 24 VAC power, the NAE requires 5 minutes to start up and become operational. Startup is completeand the NAE is operational when the green RUN LED is on steady and the red GEN FAULT LED is off. For thestartup test sequence, see LED Test Sequence at Startup. For LED locations, see Figure 79.

LED Test Sequence at StartupDuring startup, the NAE automatically initiates an LED test to verify the operational status of the LEDs. Immediatelyafter connecting the power, the following LED lighting sequence occurs:

1. The PEER COM, RUN, FC A, FC B, and GENL FAULT LEDs turn on, indicating that the Operating System (OS)is booting up. The FC A and FC B LEDs also turn on.

2. The PEER COM, RUN, GENL FAULT LEDs, and the FC A and FC B LEDs shut off. The RUN LED flashes toindicate that the NAE software is loading.

3. The LEDs display the operational status of the NAE. When the RUN LED goes on steady, the operating systemand Metasys application are running and the NAE is ready. The total time to start up the NAE depends on thesize of the database and can take several minutes.


Disconnecting Power from the NAEImportant: Make sure that the data protection battery is installed and charged before disconnecting the 24 VAC

supply power from the NAE.

When 24 VAC supply power to an NAE is disconnected or lost, the NAE is non-operational, but the POWER LEDremains on and the data protection battery continues to power the NAE for up to 5 minutes while volatile data isbacked up to nonvolatile memory. The RUN LED goes off when data backup and shutdown are complete. SeeFigure 79.

System Re-Boot SwitchThe System Re-Boot switch forces a manual restart of the NAE processor. See Figure 79. All data changes madeto the system since the last time the NAE saved data are lost on restart, including alarm, trend, and audit trail data.Press the System Re-Boot switch only if the NAE fails to respond and cannot be accessed by any user device. Donot press the switch unless you have tried other reasonable means to fix the problem.

Troubleshooting

LED Status IndicatorsThe NAE55 has a set of LEDs to indicate power and communication status. Figure 79 shows the LEDs and Table35 describes their meaning.

Figure 79: MS-NAE5510-2U/3U (Left) and MS-NAE5510-1U (Right) LED Designations

Table 35: NAE LEDs Designation, Normal Status, Description, and Other ConditionsDescriptions/Other ConditionsNormalLEDOn Steady = Unit is getting power from either the battery or 24 VAC power. Alsosee the 24 VAC LED. Off Steady = Unit is shut down.

On SteadyPOWER (Green)

Flicker = Data is transferring on the Ethernet connection. Ethernet traffic is generaltraffic (may not be for the NAE55).

Off Steady = No Ethernet traffic, probably indicates a dead Ethernet network orbad Ethernet connection.

FlickerETHERNET (Green)

On Steady = Ethernet connection is established at 10 Mbps.On Steady10/LINK (Green)On Steady (Green) = Ethernet connection is established at 100 Mbps.

On Steady (Yellow) = Ethernet connection is established at 1,000 Mbps.

On Steady100/1000 LINK(Green/Yellow)


Table 35: NAE LEDs Designation, Normal Status, Description, and Other ConditionsDescriptions/Other ConditionsNormalLEDOn Steady = Controllers are defined to FC A (FC Bus 1 or N2 Trunk 1) in theNAE55, but none are communicating (NAE55 transmitting only). Flicker = Normalcommunications; FC A port is transmitting and receiving data. Flickers are generallyin sync with data transmission but should not be used to indicate specifictransmission times.

Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC A (FC Bus 1 or N2 Trunk 1) inthe NAE55.

FlickerFC A (Green)

On Steady = Controllers are defined to FC B (FC Bus 2 or N2 Trunk 2) in theNAE55, but none are communicating. (NAE55 transmitting only) Flicker = Normalcommunications; FC B port is transmitting and receiving data. Flickers are generallyin sync with data transmission but should not be used to indicate specifictransmission times.

Off Steady = No field controllers are defined to FC B (FC Bus 2 or N2 Trunk 2) inthe NAE55.

FlickerFC B (Green)

Flicker = Data traffic between NAEs. For an NAE55 that is not a Site Director, thisLED indicates regular heartbeat communications with the Site Director. For a SiteDirector NAE55, flashes are more frequent and indicate heartbeat communicationsfrom all other NAE devices on the site. For a single NAE55 on a network withoutan Application and Data Server (ADS), there is no flicker.

Varies (see nextcolumn)

PEER COMM (Green)

On Steady = NAE55 software is running.

On 1 second, Off 1 second = NAE55 software is in startup mode.

On 0.5 seconds, Off 0.5 seconds = NAE55 software is shutting down.

Off Steady = Operating system is shutting down or software is not running.

On SteadyRun (Green)

On Steady = 24 VAC power is present.

Off Steady = Loss of 24 VAC power. In the Off Steady condition, the NAE55 canbe running on battery power. Also see the POWER LED.

On Steady24 VAC (Green)

On Steady = Battery fault. Replace the battery. Battery is not connected or cannotbe charged. The BATT FAULT LED may remain On for up to 24 hours after initiallypowering on the NAE55. If the BATT FAULT LED remains on longer than 48 hoursafter initially powering on the NAE55, check the battery connection or replace thebattery.

Off SteadyBATT FAULT (Red)

On Steady = General Fault. Fault conditions are user configurable in software.Preconfigured fault conditions include excessive memory use, excessive flash use,excessive CPU or printed wire board (PWB) temperature, and Battery Fault. Innormal operation, the GENL FAULT LED stays on steady for the first half of thestartup sequence.

Off SteadyGENL FAULT (Red)

SpecificationsTable 36: Smoke Control MS-NAE5510-1U and MS-NAE5510-2U Technical Specifications

PAN-PWRSP-U or PAN-96VAXFR-U: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VACminimum/30 VACmaximum),50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2

Power Requirement

50 VA maximumPower ConsumptionIndoor, DryInstallation Environment0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew pointAmbient Operating Conditions-40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F); 5 to 95% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew pointAmbient Storage Conditions


Table 36: Smoke Control MS-NAE5510-1U and MS-NAE5510-2U Technical SpecificationsSupports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable gel cell battery: 12 V, 1.2 Ah, witha typical life of 3 to 5 years at 21°C (70°F); Product Code Number: MS-BAT1010-0

Data Protection Battery

Maintains real-time clock through a power failure. Onboard cell; typical life 10 years at 21°C(70°F)

Clock Battery

MS-NAE5510-1U: 400 MHz Pentium® Geode® GX533 processor

MS-NAE5510-2U: 1.6 GHz Intel® Atom™ processor

Processor

MS-NAE5510-1U: 512 MB Flash nonvolatile memory for operating system, configurationdata, and operations data storage and backup; 256 MB Synchronous Dynamic RandomAccess Memory (DRAM) for operations data dynamic memory.

MS-NAE5510-2U: 4 GB flash nonvolatile memory for operating system, configuration data,and operations data storage and backup; 1 GB synchronous dynamic random access memory(SDRAM) for operations data dynamic memory for all models.

Memory

MS-NAE5510-1U: Microsoft Windows XP® Embedded, must be upgraded to WES2009operating system

MS-NAE5510-2U: Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard (WES) 2009

Operating System

One Ethernet port; 10/100/1,000 Mbps; 8-pin RJ-45 connector

Two optically isolated RS-485 ports; 9,600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k baud; pluggable and keyed4-position terminal blocks

Two RS-232-C serial ports, with standard 9-pin sub-D connectors, that support all standardbaud rates (not approved for Smoke Control use)

Two USB serial ports with standard USB connectors (not approved for Smoke Control use)

Network and Serial Interfaces

Plastic housing with internal metal shield

Plastic material: ABS + polycarbonate

Housing

On flat surface with screws on four mounting feet or on dual 35 mm DIN railMounting226 x 332 x 96.5 mm (8.9 x 13.1 x 3.8 in.) including mounting feet

Minimum space for mounting: 303 x 408 x 148 mm (12.0 x 16.1 x 5.8 in.)

Dimensions(Height x Width xDepth)

2.9 kg (6.4 lb)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCNPAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment,FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, Smoke Control Units andAccessories for Fire Alarm Systems Equipment

Compliance

Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment,Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 10th Edition Listed, Smoke Control Unitsand Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

Europe: CE Mark - Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance withthe essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive.

Australia and New Zealand: RCM Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant

BACnet International: BACnet Testing Laboratories™ (BTL) 35-2004 Listed BACnet BuildingController (B-BC)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standard. For application at conditionsbeyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls shall not be liable fordamages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.


Table 37: Smoke Control MS-NAE5510-3U Technical SpecificationsDedicated nominal 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply (North America) at 50/60 Hz (20 VACminimum to 30 VAC maximum)

Power Requirement

50 VA maximumPower ConsumptionIndoor, DryInstallation Environment0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew pointAmbient Operating Conditions-40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F); 5 to 95% RH, 30°C (86°F) maximum dew pointAmbient Storage ConditionsSupports data protection on power failure. Rechargeable gel cell battery: 12 V, 1.2 Ah, witha typical life of 3 to 5 years at 21°C (70°F); Product Code Number: MS-BAT1010-0

Data Protection Battery

Maintains real-time clock through a power failure. Onboard cell: typical life of 10 years at 21°C(70°F)

Clock Battery

1.46 GHz Intel Atom® Bay Trail E3815 processor for MS-NAE55xx-3 modelsProcessor16 GB flash nonvolatile memory for operating system, configuration data, and operations datastorage and backup for MS-NAE55xx-3 models.

2 GB DDR3 SDRAM for operations data dynamic memory for all models

Memory

Johnson Controls OEM Version of Microsoft® Windows® Embedded Standard 7 with SP1(WES7)

Operating System

One Ethernet port; 10/100/1,000 Mbps; 8-pin RJ-45 connector

Two optically isolated RS-485 ports; 9,600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k baud; pluggable and keyed4 position terminal blocks (RS-485 terminal blocks available on NAE55 models only)

Two RS-232-C serial ports, with standard 9-pin sub-D connectors, that support all standardbaud rates (not approved for Smoke Control use)

Two USB 2.0 serial ports with standard USB connectors (not approved for Smoke Controluse)

Network and Serial Interfaces

Plastic housing with internal metal shield

Plastic material: ABS + polycarbonate

Housing

On flat surface with screws on four mounting feet or on dual 35 mm DIN railMounting226 x 332 x 96.5 mm (8.9 x 13.1 x 3.8 in.) including mounting feet

Minimum space for mounting: 303 x 408 x 148 mm (12.0 x 16.1 x 5.8 in.)

Dimensions(Height x Width xDepth)

2.9 kg (6.4 lb)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCNPAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment,FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, Smoke Control Units andAccessories for Fire Alarm Systems Equipment

Compliance

Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, Signal Equipment,Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 10th Edition Listed, Smoke Control Unitsand Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

Europe: CE Mark - Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance withthe essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive.

Australia and New Zealand: RCM Mark, Australia/NZ Emissions Compliant

BACnet International: BTL 35-2004 Listed B-BC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standard. For application at conditionsbeyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office. Johnson Controls shall not be liable fordamages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.


UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels must be positioned by the factory as shown in Figure 80.

Figure 80: UL/cUL Label Placement for the MS-NAE5510-2U, MS-NAE5510-3U, or MS-NAE5510-2UW (Topand Side Views)


N2 Bus

N2 Bus OverviewThe N2 Bus is a 9600 baud RS-485 local network that connects Metasys network engines to field controllers andpoint interfaces. The N2 Bus uses the MS/TP protocol. The master device (NAE or NCE) initiates all communicationwith lower-level devices. The NAE55 models support two N2 Buses. The legacy N2 Bus lower-level devices thatare UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed include the following:

• Air Handling Unit (AHU)• Variable Air Volume (VAV) controller• Unitary (UNT) controller• Variable Air Volume Module Assembly (VMA) 1400• Extended Digital Plant Controller (DX-9100)• Function Modules (FMs)• Extension Modules (XTMs and XTs)• Expansion Modules (XPs, XPA, XPB, XPEs, XPLs, XPTs)

These newer N2 Bus controllers are also included in the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing:

• Field Equipment Controller (FEC and FEU)• Advanced Application Field Equipment Controller (FAC)• VMA1600• IOM and IOU (Input/Output Module)

The N2 Bus is typically installed with 22 AWG three-conductor unshielded twisted cable. Optionally, you can useshielded, twisted cable or optical fiber. The use of shielded cable is recommended only for trunk segments that arerouted near highly inductive loads produced by motors, or by transformers and (non-electronic) lighting ballasts. Theuse of optical fiber is for routing bus between buildings. Only the CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT and EIMK-100T/FT Ethernetmedia converts with fiber optic ports are approved.

For most installations, N2 Bus segments use a daisy-chain network topology (Figure 81); however, when repeatersare used to extend the network, a branch or star topology can also be implemented. See Table 38.

Most N2 devices are connected to the N2 Bus with a removable terminal block on the device. Connection occurswhen you terminate the N2 wires between the master device (network engine) and the lower-level devices (fieldcontrollers).

Figure 81 shows an example of several devices connected to the N2 Bus.


Figure 81: Example of N2 Bus Layout

N2 Bus Rules and RecommendationsTable 38 summarizes the rules and recommendations to follow when installing the N2 Bus.

Table 38: N2 Bus Rules and RecommendationsRule or RecommendationCategoryTypically daisy-chained; branch or star configuration acceptable when repeaters are used.GeneralNAE55 Series models can support up to two local N2 buses.

Note: When a second N2 bus is added to the NAE, be sure the trunk number has not beenused on the NAE and enter a Network Address that is unique for the entire site. Thisapplies for any model of NAE.

100 devices total on the N2 Bus (60 to 200 TC-9100s)

50 devices per bus segment (not to exceed 100 device maximum for bus)

Number of Devices and BusSegments

One N2 Bus repeater may be applied to the N2 Bus.

Note: Any path from the NAE to an N2 device cannot go through more than one repeateror two pairs of fiber modems.


Table 38: N2 Bus Rules and RecommendationsRule or RecommendationCategory1524 m (5000 ft) between NAE to farthest N2 device before repeater is needed

3048 m (10,000 ft) from NAE to farthest N2 device (three segments of 1524 m [5000 ft] each)

2012 m (6600 ft) between two fiber modems

Note: Some device models and third-party devices may have reduced capabilities.

Cable Length for N2 Bus andBus Segments

22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted unshielded cable or

22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted shielded cable

Optical fiber on the N2 Bus is also permitted. Use only the CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT andEIMK-100T/FT Ethernet switches with fiber optic ports. For cable type, see Fiber-Optic CableConnections.

Recommended Cable

Two switched EOL per segment (preferred)

One switched EOL per segment (required)

EOL Termination

N2 Bus SpecificationsTable 39 lists the installation specifications for the N2 Bus.

Table 39: N2 Bus SpecificationsSpecificationCategoryModule 256 ChecksumError Checking1–255 (Do not use address 254 or 255 if VMAs are connected)Device AddressingUp to 100 (60 to 200 TC-9100s)Number of N2 DevicesRS485Data Transmission StandardBaseband, 9600 baud, ASCII/Hexadecimal characterSignaling Method and RateTested to pass IEEE 587 and 472 waveformsSurge ProtectionNetwork of voltages, biases, and resistors that are switch selectable.

Note: ASCs are self-terminating and therefore do not require End-of-Line(EOL) resistors.

Termination Method

3-wire twisted cable (22 AWG recommended)

Two twisted pair telephone cable

Two twisted pair cable with a shield

(All cables listed above can be either solid or stranded.)

Optical Fiber (see Fiber-Optic Cable Connections)

Transmission Media

One hard ground per bus segment when using shielded cable.Shield GroundingDaisy-chained

Branch or star configuration acceptable when repeaters are used.

Physical Configuration


Table 39: N2 Bus SpecificationsSpecificationCategoryUp to 1524 m (5000 ft)Distance between DevicesRepeaters• NU-RPT101-1U (115 VAC)• NU-RPT24-0U (24 VAC)

Note: A repeater is required to support more than 50 devices per trunk segmentor trunk cable segment longer than 1,524 m (5,000 ft). A repeater canalso separate N2 devices that are not part of the UL/cUL 864 UUKL10th Edition listing.

Optional Vendor Components

Device Addressing on the N2 BusAll devices connected to the N2 Bus require a unique address to identify the device to network engines. Thesemaster devices use the address for polling, monitoring, and commanding lower-level N2 Bus devices and their fieldpoints.

For most devices on an N2 bus, the (non-supervisory) device address is set by positioning the DIP switches on thedevice’s ADDRESS DIP switch block. The DIP switch blocks are binary switch blocks, with each switch representinga binary numerical value when the switch is in the ON position. For other devices, such as networked thermostats,the address is configured in software.

Note: To determine the N2 address number to use for each device, refer to addresses shown on the engineereddrawing’s riser diagram or room schedule.

Figure 82 shows the DIP switch designs for the controllers that reside on the N2 Bus.


Figure 82: Address Switch Examples on Various N2 Bus Controllers: Address 168

Each DIP switch has eight segments with two positions: ON (In) and OFF (Out). Each switch corresponds to an 8-bitnumber from 1 to 128. Switches are labeled 1 to 8 or 1 to 128 (in 8-bit increments) and have the following decimalequivalents:

Table 40: Switch Number and its Decimal Equivalent8 or 1287 or 646 or 325 or 164 or 83 or 421Switch

Number1286432168421Decimal

Equivalent

The N2 hardware address is determined by summing the values beside each DIP switch that is set to ON. Forexample, Figure 82 shows how to set an Address of 168. Switch 128 (or Switch 8), Switch 32 (or Switch 6), andSwitch 8 (or Switch 4) are each set to ON (128 + 32 + 8 = 168), and all others are set to OFF.

Note: As a best practice when setting an N2 address, begin with the largest switch setting possible. For example,if you need to set Address 100, you would start with the switch that is closest to (but not greater than) 100,which is Switch 64 (7); then select the next lower numbered switch(es) that would provide a sum of 100,which are Switch 32 (6) and Switch 4 (3).


The process of setting or changing an N2 device address involves turning off power to the device, setting the N2address, then returning power to device. A power cycle is required so that the controller is updated with the newaddress. Follow the steps as outlined in Table 41.

Table 41: Steps for Field Controller AddressingStepsField Controller1. Turn off power to the device.2. Position the DIP switches to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format. The

switches are located in the lower right corner of the AHU controller board.3. Return power to the device.

AHUs

1. Turn off power to the device.2. Position the DIP switches to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format.3. Return power to the device.

VAVs and UNTs

1. Turn off power to the device.2. Detach the controller from the unit by flipping down the front panel flap and releasing the

retaining screw. Pull the right side of the controller away from the base until it is free. Thencompletely remove the controller from the base, detaching the lugs on the left side. Placethe controller in a safe location.

3. Locate the Address switches on the unit.4. Position the DIP switches to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format.5. Reattach the controller to the base with Screw C.6. Return power to the device.

DX-9100s

1. Turn off power to the device.2. Position the DIP switches to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format. The

switches are located on the front of the unit.3. Return power to the device.

XTs and XTMs

Hardware Addressing:

1. Turn off power to the device.2. Position the DIP switches to configure the address using the 8-bit binary format. The

switches are located on the left side of the controller.3. Return power to the device.

VMA1400s

Software Addressing:

1. Set all N2 address DIP switches to Address 0 or 255 on all VMAs on the N2 Bus. If theDIP switches are set to any other value during power up, the controller defaults to hardwareaddressing.

2. Supply power to the units.3. Program each address through the Zone Bus using a laptop, AS-CBLPRO-2 or

AS-CVTPROx00-0 converter, and HVAC PRO software Release 8.01 or later. Select eitherController Information or VMA Balancer Tool from the Action menu in HVAC PRO software.If you select Controller Information, select Single Device.

4. Select Zone Bus. The Controller Information screen or VMABalancer Tool screen appears.5. Select an N2 address from the drop-down list.6. Click Set Address.7. Wait for the new address to appear in the N2 Address field of the Controller Information

screen or Balancer Tool screen.

No N2 address required; passive device.N2 Repeater


The order of the N2 addresses you elect to use does not need to match the sequential order in which the devicesare installed in the building. For example, the first controller down the line may have Address 5 and the last controllermay have Address 1. No delays in communication result in mixing the order of address assignments. However,using an incrementing address assignment scheme starting with Address 1 on the first device connected to thenetwork engine creates an intelligent network design.

If two devices have been assigned the same N2 Bus address on a single logical bus, even across bus segmentswith a repeater in between, unreliable communications occur.

The supervisory device that also has an N2 Bus connection (such as the NAE) does not require an N2 Bus address.Table 42 indicates the N2 Bus addressing rules.

Table 42: N2 Bus Addressing RulesRulesCategoryOne address used on one device across entire network.General1 to 253

Do not use addresses 0, 254, or 255.

Address Range

N2 Bus repeaters do not require an N2 Bus address and are not identified as an onlinedevice to the network. They are passive devices.

Addressing N2 Bus Repeaters


End-of-Line Termination on the N2 BusEnd-of-line termination is required on the N2 Bus to reduce signal reflection when data transmissions reach the endof a bus segment and bounce back. EOL termination is built into some Metasys N2 devices and is enabled with aswitch or jumper on the device. Other controllers, such as AHUs, UNTs, DXs, VMAs, and VAVs, are self-terminating(EOL termination built-in) and therefore do not require EOL termination. For devices located at the end of a bussegment that are not self-terminating (no built-in EOL switch), use an EOL terminator. The recommended EOLterminator is the MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator. For a summary of EOL terminations, see Table 43.

Table 43: End-of-Line Termination SummaryWhen Device is Not at Endof Bus

When Device is at End ofBus

TerminationTermination

NoneNoneSelf-TerminatingAHU, UNT, DX, VAV,VMA, XT, XTM

Set EOL Switch OffSet EOL Switch OnBuilt-in EOL SwitchNAE and N2 RepeaterNoneAdd EOL TerminatorNo Controller EOL ProvisionTECs

The N2 Bus may consist of up to two bus segments. Each bus segment on an N2 Bus requires two EOL terminationdevices, one at each end of the bus segment. All other devices on the N2 Bus should have their EOL terminationdisabled (EOL switches Off). If only one device on an N2 segment has an EOL termination, it must be set to On.

Figure 83 shows some examples of how to properly terminate devices on the N2 Bus depending on device type.

Figure 83: N2 Bus Segment EOL Termination Scenarios

Wiring the N2 Bus





Important: Properly install, terminate, and ground the cable shield on the N2 Bus to minimize inductive noise,which can result in unreliable communication on the bus.


Observe the following when installing and wiring the N2 Bus:

• Do not run cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends, abrasion, and the potential for severing or crushingthe cable.

• Route cables neatly to promote good ventilation, visibility, testing, and ease of service.• Provide some slack in the wires and cables to allow for access and servicing.• Protect, coil, and secure any excess cable.• Ensure proper grounding for bus cable shielding.• Ensure proper EOL termination on buses and bus segments.• Use dedicated transformers (either PAN-PWRSP-U or PAN-96VAXFR-U) for 24 VAC supply power to the network

devices.

The N2 Bus uses 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted unshielded cable. Figure 84 shows a wiring detail for an N2Bus connected to an NAE. See Table 38 for bus cable length limits.

Follow these guidelines for wiring the N2 Bus:

• Wire the bus devices following the network topology options shown in Figure 81. Maintain consistent polarityalong the entire N2 Bus. If your set of wires are colored black, white, and blue, use the following wire color codingscheme:Table 44: N2 Bus Wire Color Scheme

Wire ColorTerminalBlack+White–BlueREF

• Twist the N2 Bus lead pairs together before inserting into the termination and ensure that the termination is tightat each terminal block on the daisy-chain.

• Use shielded cable only for applications that encounter high inductive interference or noise, or high RF interference.For details, see Grounding the N2 Bus Cable Shield.

• Understand how the shield connection terminal (SHLD) on the NAE FC (N2) Bus terminal block is used. TheSHLD terminal is provided for connecting and isolating the cable shields on the bus cables connected at the N2Bus terminal blocks. The terminal is isolated and not connected to ground. At 3-terminal bus connections, connectthe cable shield drains together with a small wirenut or similar connector.

• Apply soft ground connections along the N2 Bus segment if the segment experiences persistent networkcommunication problems or if the segment encounters high ambient inductive noise. To create a soft groundconnection (Figure 85), connect a 560 pF capacitor between the cable shield and ground. The connection toground should be made within the first inch of entering the enclosure.


Screw Terminal Blocks for Connecting N2 Bus CableMany field controllers have pluggable screw terminal blocks for easy N2 Bus connections. Connect the devices tothe N2 Bus segments in a daisy-chain configuration as shown in Figure 81. For the NAE, connect the N2 Bus to theFC Bus terminal block.

Note: The SHLD terminal on the FC bus terminal block is electrically isolated from ground and is provided as aconvenient terminal for connecting the cable shield in a daisy-chain on the bus segment.

Figure 84: Wiring Detail of N2 Bus Connected to FC (N2) Bus Terminal Block on NAE

Grounding the N2 Bus Cable ShieldShielded cable is optional on an N2 Bus, but recommended for applications that encounter high inductive interferenceor noise, or high Radio Frequency (RF) interference. These types of interference can adversely affect N2 applications,causing poor bus performance and frequent device offline occurrences. Experience has shown that installing aproperly grounded shielded bus cable in N2 applications greatly reduces the impact of ambient inductive noise andRF interference.

To properly ground the cable shield on an N2 Bus installation, the cable shields on each bus segment must beconnected in a daisy-chain fashion. Each daisy-chained segment must be connected at one point (only) to a hardground connection, preferably at the NAE where the N2 Bus terminates. In metal panel or enclosure applications,connect the cable shield to ground where the bus cable enters the panel or enclosure that contains the bus supervisor.On bus segments without a bus supervisor, the best practice is to connect the cable shield to hard ground at a busdevice near the middle of the bus segment.

Important: Ensure that the cable shield is connected to hard ground at only one point on the bus segmentand is completely isolated from hard ground at all other points. Multiple hard ground connections on abus segment can create ground loop currents in the cable shield, resulting in poor bus performanceand frequent device offline occurrences.

In certain environments with high ambient inductive interference or strong radio frequency transmissions, an N2 Businstallation may require the addition of soft ground connections along the bus segments to enhance bus performanceand reduce device offline occurrences, or possible device damage.


Examples of potential inductive interference include large motors, contactors, relays, welding equipment, high-voltageconductors that are not in metal conduit or raceways, other high wattage devices within 10 m (30 ft) of the bus cable,and areas of frequent lightning.

Examples of potential radio frequency interference include locations near airports, hospitals, radio or televisiontransmission towers, police and fire stations, or factories. Mobile transmitters in police, fire, emergency, and fleetvehicles are also potential sources of radio frequency interference.

Note: The majority of properly grounded N2 Bus installations do not require soft ground connections, but you shouldassess the potential interference that your application may encounter (before you install the bus). It is moreefficient to prepare for soft ground connections when making the bus terminations at the initial installationthan to return and do it later.

Soft ground connections should be made within 2 inches of the bus terminations of any bus device that experiencesfrequent offline occurrences resulting from high ambient inductive or RF interference (Figure 85).

Figure 85: Applying a Soft Ground Connection to an N2 Bus

N2 Bus RepeaterThe NU-RPT101-1U and NU-RPT24-0U repeaters are optional components on the N2 Bus that serve two purposes:

• Isolate Smoke Control equipment from Non-Smoke Control equipment.• Extend the physical length of the N2 Bus on a single Smoke Control N2 Bus.

The repeater must be factory-installed in a UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Listed enclosure. Therepeater provides isolation on the N2 Bus end of a smoke control system. Input and output wiring is supervised andpower-limited. The repeater has non-power-limited wiring for the input power source. Only one repeater per trunkis permitted.


Figure 86: N2 Bus Repeater (NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U)

For more details on installing the repeater, refer to the manufacturer’s literature.


Physical FeaturesFigure 87: N2 Bus Repeater Physical Features

Setting EOL for the N2 Bus RepeaterFigure 87 shows the EOL jumper locations for the N2 Bus Repeater. Table 45 indicates the EOL jumper settings.

Table 45: EOL Repeater SettingIf RepeaterJumperSideAt end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).J1 and J2Side ANot at end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOLOut).

At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).J3 and J4Side BNot at end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOLOut).


Repeater SpecificationsTable 46: Physical Specifications

SpecificationCategory-13 to 158°F (-25 to 70°C)Operating Temperature Range10 to 93% RH, NoncondensingRelative Humidity (RH)NU-RPT101-1U: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.05A

NU-RPT24-0U: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.18A

Power

0.5 A, 250 V, 3AG typePower Line Fuse2 to 18 AWG (without terminal lugs);

14 to 18 AWG (with terminal lugs)

Power Wire AWG

Less than 32 feet (10 meters) lengthPower Wire LengthThe network repeater provides galvanic and opto-coupler isolation between RS-485(A),RS-485(B), AC power, and chassis ground.

Common mode voltages are permitted up to 250 V rms or 354 VDC (withstands a 1,500VAC dielectric strength test for 1 min. without breakdown) on a continuous basis.

Complies with test requirements outlined in ANSI C39.5-1974 for voltage ratings specified.

Isolation

Withstands an RFI field strength of 10 V per meter at 27 MHz, 151 MHz, and 467 MHz withno digital effect, per SAMA PMC 33.1 test procedures.

RFI Resistance

Field and power line terminals withstand ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1978 Surge WithstandingCapability (SWC) Test with no component failures.

Unit is tested to a standardized test waveform that is representative of surges (high-frequencytransient electrical interference), observed in actual installations.

Line Noise Effects

Network repeater - both RS-485 connections usemodular terminal blocks with screw clamps.Wire range 14 to 26 AWG, CSA approval.

Communications Connections

Network repeater termination block.Power Wire Connections7 x 4.3 x 2.1 in (17.8 x 10.3 x 5.3 cm)Dimensions (L x W x D)3.0 pounds (1.4 kg) packed per unit.WeightUL Listed, CSA Certified file LR25710.Approvals

Table 47: Communication SpecificationsSpecificationCategorySwitch settings on unit for 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, and 76.8K baudrates.

Switch must be in the proper baud rate position for proper operation.

Baud Rates

One unit load equivalent.RS-485 Bus LoadingComplete RS-485 compliance for up to 32 unit loads (31 unit loads if a repeater is used).RS-485 Bus DriveThe EOL termination network is enabled for the A side or B side when the associated pairof jumpers are positioned over pins 1 and 2. Conversely, the EOL is disabled (out of thecircuit) when the pair jumpers are positioned over pins 2 and 3.

The EOL termination network is individually selected on both the A and B sides by a pair ofshorting clips. The A-side is controlled by jumper pair J1, J2 and the B-side is controlled byjumper pair J3 and J4

End-of-Line TerminationNetwork


Table 47: Communication SpecificationsSpecificationCategoryHalf-duplex onlyDuplexTen bits typical (1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit). Other formats are supported.Data Format


Figure 88: UL/cUL Label Placement for N2 Bus Repeater (NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U)

N2 Bus Transient ProtectionThe N2 Bus communication lines must have an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protection kit installed when theconduit run between enclosures does not remain in the same room. For details, see Field Controller I/O TransientProtection.

The N2 Bus field device’s I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protectionkit installed when the conduit run between the controller’s enclosure and the N2 Bus I/O field device does not remainin the same room. For details, see Field Controller I/O Transient Protection.

N2 Bus Controllers

Standard N2 Bus Field Controller Features, Connections, and GuidelinesThe Smoke Control N2 Bus field controller models have several common features, wiring connections, guidelines.The following sections cover these similarities.


MountingImportant: All N2 Bus devices must be mounted in a smoke listed enclosure at the Johnson Controls factory, with

the exception of VMAs that require installation on VAV boxes. Do not field-mount or alter the mountingof any device installed in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure. Field-mounting oraltering the mounting of any device installed in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosurevoids the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control listing.

Follow these guidelines when mounting the smoke listed enclosure that houses N2 Bus devices:

• Ensure that the mounting surface can support the enclosure.• Mount the enclosure where ambient operating conditions are always maintained. Do not mount the enclosure

where it may be exposed to any water, condensation, or other liquids, or to corrosive or flammable vapors ofany kind.

• Do not mount the enclosure on surfaces that are prone to vibration or in areas where electromagnetic emissionsfrom other devices or wiring can interfere with controller communication.

• Allow for sufficient space around the enclosure for cable and wire connections, easy cover removal, and goodventilation (minimum of 50 mm [2 inches] in each direction).

N2 Bus Terminal BlockThe N2 Bus terminal block is a blue, removable, 4-terminal plug that fits into a board-mounted jack.

Wire the removable N2 Bus terminal block plugs on the controller, and other field controllers in a daisy-chainconfiguration using 3-wire twisted, shielded cable. See Figure 134 for more information.

Figure 89: N2 Bus Terminal Block Wiring

Note: The N2 Bus Shield (SHLD) terminal is isolated and can be used to connect (daisy chain) the shields for N2Bus wiring.

Supply Power TerminalsAll N2 Bus field controllers are powered by a 24 VAC power supply from a transformer mounted in the enclosure.Some controllers have a removable 3-terminal power block that plugs into the controller. Other controllers have aterminal strip with mounting screws or spade connectors for the power supply wires.

Wire the 24 VAC supply power wires from the transformer to the appropriate terminals on the N2 Bus controller.The example in Figure 90 shows termination to the HOT and COM terminals on the terminal plug of a UNT controller.In this example, the middle terminal on the supply power terminal block is not used.


Figure 90: 24 VAC Supply Power Terminal Block Wiring

Note: The supply power wire colors may be different on transformers from other manufacturers. Refer to thetransformer manufacturer’s instructions and the project installation drawings for wiring details.

Important: Connect the PAN-PWRSP-U power supply to the controller and all other network devices so thattransformer phasing is uniform across the network devices. Powering network devices with uniform 24VAC supply power phasing reduces noise, interference, and ground loop problems. The controller doesnot require an earth ground connection.

Input and Output Wiring GuidelinesTable 48 provides information and guidelines about the functions, ratings, and requirements for the controller inputand output terminals; it also references guidelines for determining proper wire sizes and cable lengths.

In addition to the wiring guidelines in Table 48, observe these guidelines when wiring controller inputs and outputs:

• Run all low-voltage wiring and cables separate from high-voltage wiring.• All input and output cables, regardless of wire size or number of wires, should consist of stranded, insulated,

and twisted copper wires.• Shielded cable is not required for input or output cables.• Shielded cable is recommended for input and output cables that are exposed to high electromagnetic or radio

frequency noise.• Inputs/outputs with cables less than 100 ft (30 m) typically do not require an offset in the software setup. Cable

runs over 100 ft (30m) may require an offset in the input/output software setup.


Table 48: I/O Terminal Blocks, Functions, Ratings, Requirements, and CablesTo Determine Wire Sizeand Maximum CableLength

Function, Ratings, and RequirementsTerminalLabels

Terminal Block Label

Same as AIn.

Note: Use 3-wire cable fordevices that sourcepower from the +15 Vterminal.

15 VDC Power Source for active (3-wire) inputdevices connected to the Analog Input terminals.

Provides 35 mA total current.

+15 VANALOG

(Inputs)

See Guideline A in Table 94.Analog Input - Voltage Mode (0–10 VDC)

10 VDC maximum input voltage

AIn

See Guideline B in Table 94.Analog Input - Current Mode (4-20 mA)

Internal 100 ohm load Impedance

See Guideline A in Table 94.Analog Input - Resistive Mode (0–600k ohm)

Internal 12 V, 15k ohm pull up

Qualified Sensors: 0–2k potentiometer,

RTD (1k Nickel [Johnson Controls sensor],

1k Platinum, and A99B Silicon TemperatureSensor)

Same as (Universal) INn.Analog Input Common for all Analog Inputterminals

AI CM

or

COM

or

A COMSee Guideline A in Table 94.Binary Input - Dry Contacts, Momentary Push,

Button at SensorINnBINARY

(Inputs)Binary Input - Dry Contacts, Momentary Push,Button at Sensor

0 to 15 VDC or 0 to 24 VDC

10 mA minimum

Binary Input - Pulse Counter/AccumulatorMode (some models)Binary Input Common for all Binary Input (IN)terminals

Note: All Binary ICOMn terminals share acommon, which is isolated from all othercommons.

ICOMn





See Guideline A in Table 94.Analog Output - Voltage Mode (0-10 VDC)

10 VDC maximum output voltage

10 mA maximum output current

OUTnANALOG

(Outputs)

See Guideline B in Table 94.Analog Output - Current Mode (4-20 mA)Same as (Analog) OUTn.Analog Output Signal Common for all Analog

OUT terminals.

Note: All Analog OCOMn terminals share acommon, which is isolated from all othercommons.

OCOMn

See Guideline C in Table 94.Binary Output - 24 VAC Triacs

24 VAC, 50-500 mA loads

OUTnBINARY

(Outputs)

Binary Output Common (for OUTn terminal)

Note: Each Binary Output common terminal(OCOMn) is isolated from all other commons,including other Binary Output commons.

OCOMn

Cable and Wire Length GuidelinesTable 49: Cable Length Guidelines for Recommended Wire Sizes

AssumptionsMaximum Cable Lengthand Type

Wire Size/Gauge and TypeGuideline

100mVmaximum voltage drop

Depending on the cable lengthand the connected input oroutput device, you may have todefine an offset in the setupsoftware for the input or outputpoint.

457 m (1,500 ft) twisted wire1.0mm (18 AWG) stranded copperA297 m (975 ft) twisted wire0.8mm (20 AWG) stranded copper

183 m (600 ft) twisted wire0.6mm (22 AWG) stranded copper




229 m (750 ft) twisted wire1.0mm (18 AWG) stranded copperB137 m (450 ft) twisted wire0.8mm (20 AWG) stranded copper



N/ASee Figure 91 to determinecable length.

Use twisted wire cable.

See Figure 91 to select wiresize/gauge.

Use stranded copper wire.

C

Maximum Cable Length versus Load CurrentUse Figure 91 to estimate the maximum cable length relative to the wire size and the load current (in mA) whenwiring inputs and outputs.


Figure 91: Maximum Wire Length by Current and Wire Size

AHU ControllersThe Air Handling Unit (AHU) controller is a complete digital control system for most common air handlingconfigurations, including single zone, variable air volume, multi-zone, and dual duct. The controller communicateson the N2 Bus, seamlessly providing all point and control information to the rest of the network. For a list of AHUsand components approved for smoke control, see Table 126.


Figure 92: AP-AHU102-0 Air Handling Unit Controller


Physical FeaturesFigure 93: AHU102 Physical Features (Plastic Shell Removed)


Figure 94: AHU102 Jumper Settings

Wiring










To wire all AHU controller models:

1. Terminate wiring per engineering drawings.2. Wire the N2 Bus in a daisy chain without “Y” or “T” connections unless N2 repeaters are used.3. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate address in the range of 1 to 254.4. Add SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protector kits to all N2 Bus communication terminal block connections (if

required). See SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit for details.5. Add SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U transient protectors to all I/O terminal connections (if required). See Field Controller

I/O Transient Protection for details.6. Connect power to the AHU controller.7. Commission the AHU controller.

Transient ProtectionThe I/O lines of the AHU controller must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protectionkit installed when the conduit run that is between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does notremain in the same room. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requires transient protection.The MOV is placed between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal, and I/O terminalof the controller. Use the following reference table for installing the Input and Output MOVs per field controller forboth the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.

Table 50: AHU110 I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach AI and its corresponding +30Vterminal

+30 VAnalog Input

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground for each input

AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4, AI5, AI6, AI7, AI8Analog Inputs


AICM (one for each input)Analog Inputs


BI1, BI2, BI3, BI4, BI5, BI6, BI7, BI8Binary Inputs


BICM (one for each input)Binary Inputs

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground for each output

AO1, AO2, AO3, AO4, AO5, AO6Analog Outputs


AOCM (one for each output)Analog Outputs


Table 50: AHU110 I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground for each output

BO1, BO2, BO3, BO4, BO5, BO6, BO7, BO8, BO9, BO10Binary Outputs

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach BO and its corresponding 24V

24V (one for each output)Binary Outputs

TroubleshootingUse Table 51 to troubleshoot AHU controllers during the downloading and commissioning stages. To troubleshootbus communication, view the N2 LED on the front panel of the controller. If the LED is not blinking, no communicationis present. If the LED is blinking once per second, the N2 Bus is active but the AHU is not mapped to the Metasyssystem. If blinking twice per second, two way communication between the controller and the system is present(normal operation).

If you detect communication problems, a noisy wire adjacent to the Zone Bus can cause this behavior. Noise canbe periodically induced into the Zone Bus causing sporadic communication failures between the laptop and the AHU.Most often, noisy lines cause intermittent disruption, not total loss of communication.

Table 51: Communication Errors on Download and CommissioningSolutionDescriptionCauseError Number

orDescription

Check for missing N2 wire or tight andproper connections between the laptop,AS-CBLPRO-2, and the AHU.

The device is being sent amessage that contains an invalidcommand.

Undefined Command1

Try a different AS-CBLPRO-2 or use a CVTon the N2 Bus.

The size of the message sentdoes not correspond to the typeof message sent.

Invalid Message Size5

Check for tight and proper connectionsbetween the laptop, AS-CBLPRO-2, andthe AHU.

The command issued is not validfor the data type.

Invalid Command11

Cycle power on the AHU. If problempersists, return AHU for repair orreplacement.

The AHU cannot process thismessage at this time. Forexample, the EEPROM is notfunctioning properly.

Not Ready14

Return the AHU for repair or replacement.The AHU detected a problemwiththe EEPROM.

Bad E2 Write15

Check for missing N2 wire or tight andproper connections between the laptop,AS-CBLPRO-2, and the AHU.

Some hardware problem exists,such as a loose connection or afailed component.

No Communication16

Wait ten seconds for the reset period toexpire before trying to commission thecontroller.

Controller is still in reset mode.Resetting takes ten seconds aftera download.


The Cyclical Redundancy Checkof the message received isincorrect due to an error intransmission.

Bad CRC17



orDescription


Themessage received is not whatthe HVACPRO forWindows Loadutility expected.

InvalidResponse18

Reset the AI jumper into the proper “C”position.

The power up sequenceconstantly repeats on the AHU.

AI jumper improperly set to the “T” or “V” position.

Fix the voltage level.Voltage to the AIs is greater than10.3 VDC or less than -0.7 VDC.

SpecificationsTable 52: AHU Technical Specifications

AP-AHU102-0

AP-AHU103-300

Product Code Numbers

PAN-PWRSP-U or PAN-96VAXFR-U: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30VAC maximum), 50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2

Power Requirements

16 VA maximum (relay and valve requirements not included)Power ConsumptionOperating: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) 10 to 90% RH, Dry Indoor Environment

Storage: -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C) 10 to 90% RH

Ambient Conditions

8K bytesEEPROM Size64K bytesROM/EPROM size32K bytesRAM sizeIntel® 8051Processor11 MHzClock SpeedScrew terminalsTerminations9600 baud N2 BusSerial InterfacesAnalog Inputs:

Nickel, Silicon, Platinum, (1K ohm) or temperature sensors,

2K setpoint potentiometer (2-wire)

Voltage Input for 0-10 VDC (humidity or dew point sensor)

Current input for 0-20 mA

Binary Inputs: dry

Input Capabilities

Binary Outputs, 24 VAC triac switched, 50-500 mA loads

Analog Output, 0-20 mA

Output Capabilities

DIP switch set (1-255)

Note: 0, 255 are not available/reserved addresses.

N2 Controller Addressing

1/4 inch boltsMounting584.2 x 406.4 x 190.5 mm (23 x 16 x 7.5 in.)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)7.7 kg (17 lb)Shipping Weight


Table 52: AHU Technical SpecificationsIEEE 446 IEEE 472 IEEE 518 IEEE 587 Category A/BComplianceUnited States: UL 916 Listed PAZX, Energy Management Equipment, FCCCompliant Part 15, Subpart J, Class A

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, Smoke ControlUnits and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems Equipment

Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205,Signal Equipment, Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 10th Edition Listed, SmokeControl Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems


Figure 95: UL/cUL Label Placement for AP-AHU102 and AP-AHU103 Controllers

DX9100 ControllersThe DX9100 Extended Digital controller provides a real-time clock, extendable I/O, and graphic software programmingto support a variety of applications. Individual point monitoring and control is available through the front panel LEDdisplay. The DX-9100 also connects to the system over the N2 Bus, integrating its point and control information withthe entire controller network. For a list of DX9100 controllers and accessories approved for smoke control, see Table126.


Figure 96: DX9100 Controller

Follow these requirements when using hardwired DX-9100 controller applications:

• Install any DX-9100 controller used for smoke control in a locked enclosure to prevent unauthorized access.• You must use a DX9100-8990F base with transient protection devices (Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs).• You must monitor all alarm input Digital Inputs (DIs) and report critical alarms at the FSCS when they close (turn

On), such as a fire alarm control panel smoke detector alarm point.• You must monitor the fuse on the DI circuit of each DX-9100 controller when the DI is used for smoke control.

To do this, connect a jumper wire across one spare DI, so that it always indicates an On condition. If the fusefails, this point goes off, indicating a fuse failure. Map this point to the FSCS directly connected to the NAE as acritical alarm with a normal state of Closed (On).

• If you use Analog Outputs (AOs) in your smoke control configuration, you must monitor the fuse on the AO. Todo this, set one AO for voltage and define an Analog Input (AI) for voltage. Connect Analog Constants (ACs) setfor 50.0 to the AO that is ranged for 0-100. This gives the AO a 50 percent signal or a 5 volt output. This outputis hardwired to the AI defined for voltage with a range of 0-100 and a low limit of 20. If the AO fuse blows, thevoltage goes to 0 and the AI goes into low alarm. You must configure this alarm as a critical alarm.

• Configure any DX-9100 controller used in a smoke application with system poll priority 1 or 2.• Install an airflow status switch for all fans controlled by the DX-9100 controller. If any mismatch of command and

HVAC equipment controller status of the fans is detected, report a critical alarm at the FSCS.• Do not use the buttons on the face of the DX-9100 controller to override smoke control points.• Do not flush-mount the DX-9100 controller to the enclosure.


Physical FeaturesFigure 97: DX9100 Physical Features (Front Panel Open)

Wiring










Note: Shielded cable is not required for field wiring, but when used, hard ground the shield at the UPM enclosureand tape it back at the sensor or contact.

To wire all DX9100 controller models:

1. Terminate wiring per engineering drawings.2. Wire the N2 Bus in a daisy chain without “Y” or “T” connections unless N2 repeaters are used.3. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate address in the range of 4 to 127.4. Add SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protector kits to all N2 Bus communication terminal block connections. See

SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit for details.5. Add SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U transient protectors to all I/O terminal connections. See Field Controller I/O Transient

Protection for details.6. Connect power to the DX9100 controller.7. Commission the DX9100 controller.

Figure 98 shows the wiring terminals for the DX9100.


Figure 98: DX9100 Wiring Terminals

Transient ProtectionIf your smoke application uses the XP-9102 and field wiring leaves the room in which the XP-9102 is installed, installtransient protection as shown in Table 53. (The MOV must be a Johnson Controls Code No. SMOKE-MOVKIT.)


Table 53: Transient Protection XP-9102MOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypePlace an SMOKE-MOVKIT from AOx toAOcom for each AOwiring pair that leavesthe room.

Place an SMOKE-MOVKIT from anyAOcom to earth ground for any XP-9102that has a field wire that leaves the room.

AO1 - AOx

(x = Analog Output Number)

Analog Outputs

Place an SMOKE-MOVKIT from AIx toAIcom for each AI wiring pair that leavesthe room.

Place an SMOKE-MOVKIT from anyAIcom to earth ground for any XP-9102that has a field wire that leaves the room.

AI1 - AIx

(x = Analog Input Number)

Analog Inputs

TroubleshootingFour logic variables available in the DX9100 controller provide diagnostic information. Use the GX tool and Table54 to determine these values.

Table 54: DX9100 Controller DiagnosticsDescriptionGX LabelIf equal to 1, the DX lithium battery needs replacement. The battery has 20% or less initial capacityremaining.

BATLOW

If equal to 1, one or more trend log buffers are full.HTRRIf equal to 1, the front panel, service module, or display has been changed.MNTIf equal to 1, a serial link failure (SLF) has occurred. The value is set 60 seconds after the last messagefrom the Metasys system.

SLF

SpecificationsTable 55: DX9100 Technical Specifications

DX-9100-8990FDX-9100-8454DDX-9100-8454Product Code NumbersPAN-PWRSP-U or PAN-96VAXFR-U: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30VAC maximum), 50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2

Version 1: To maintain an active sensor supply > 15 VDC, the supply voltage mustalways exceed (24 VAC - 10%).

Power Requirements

10 VA (nominal) at 50/60 HzPower ConsumptionOperating: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) 10 to 90% RH, Dry Indoor Environment


Ambient Conditions

Lithium. Shelf life (disconnected): 10 years

Working life, with 24V power: 5 years; without 24V power: < 1 year

Rechargeable backup battery. Recharge time is one hour; capacity is seven dayswhen fully charged.

Internal Batteries

All Versions: 8 Kb RAM; 56 Kb EPROM; 8 Kb EEPROM

Additional in Version 3: 26 Kb RAM; 32 Kb ROM; 512 Byte EEPROM

Memory


Table 55: DX9100 Technical SpecificationsAll Versions: NEC 78C10

Additional in Version 3: Neuron® 3150 (Three CPUs)

Processor

Terminal block for 1 x 1.5 mm2/14 AWG (maximum) cableTerminations

Versions 1 and 2: One optically isolated RS 485 interface for N2 connection; 9600baud

Versions 2 and 3: One RS-232-C port; 9600 baud

All Versions: One optically isolated RS-485 interface for XT Bus connection; 9600baud

All Versions: One interface for service module; 600 baud

Serial Interfaces

Eight inputs, 13-bit resolution. Inputs selectable, via jumper, for 0-10 VDC (300Kminimum impedance), 0/4-20 mA (100 ohm impedance) or RTD (Ni1000, Pt1000,A99)

Version 1: Active sensor supply: 15 VDC, 100 mA for maximum of four currenttransmitters (20 mA). To maintain an active sensor supply > 15 VDC, the supplyvoltage must always exceed (24 VAC - 10%).

Versions 2 and 3: Active sensor supply: 15 VDC, 200 mA for maximum of eightcurrent transmitters (0/4-20 mA). Maximum of 80 mA may be used for voltagetransmitters.

Analog Inputs

Eight inputs via potential-free contacts

Transition counter function: maximum 10 Hz (>50 ms closed, >50 ms open)

Digital Inputs

Eight Bit Resolution

Version 1: Two outputs, selectable via jumper for 0-10 VDC (maximum 10 mA) or0/4-20 mA (maximum 500 ohm)

Versions 2 and 3: Four outputs, selectable via jumper for 0-10 VDC (maximum 10mA) or 0/4-20 mA (maximum 500 ohm). Four additional outputs 0-10 VDC(maximum 10 mA)

Analog Outputs

Six triac outputs, 24 VAC, 0.5 ampere continuous (0.8 ampere peak)Digital OutputsVersion 3 only: Sixteen analog inputs. Eight blocks of sixteen digital inputs. Sixteenanalog outputs, each with sixteen network destinations. Eight blocks of sixteendigital outputs, each block with sixteen network destinations.

Network Inputs/Outputs

Time in hours and minutes. Date in year, month, day. Automatic calendar for dayof week (1-7). Daylight saving time change at defined dates.

Realtime Clock

Material: ABS + polycarbonate, self-extinguishing VO UL 94

Protection: IP30 (IEC529)

Housing

Version 1 Controller: 148 x 184 x 81mm (5.8 x 7.3 x 3.2 in.)

Controller with Panel Mounting Base, Versions 2 and 3: 200 x 184 x 95 mm (7.9x 7.3 x 3.8 in.). Allowminimum of 160 mm (6.3 in.) depth for hinged door clearance.

Controller with Cabinet Door Mounting Frame, Versions 2 and 3: 164 x 200 x 114mm (6.5 x 7.9 x 4.5 in.)

Dimensions

(Height x Width x Depth)

Controller: 0.8 kg (1 lb 12 oz)

Panel Mounting Base: 0.8 kg (1 lb 12 oz)

Cabinet Door Mounting Frame: 0.8 kg (1 lb 12 oz)

Shipping Weight


Table 55: DX9100 Technical SpecificationsUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCNPAZX, UL 916, Energy ManagementEquipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A


Compliance

Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, SignalEquipment, Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003



Figure 99: UL/cUL Label Placement for DX-9100-8454 Controller (Front Panel Closed)

Extension Modules (XTMs) and Expansion Modules (XPs)The XTM-105 and XTM-905 extension modules used with XPx expansion modules combine intelligent processingpower with expanded Input/Output (I/O). The XTM-105 is intended for the N2 Bus, and the XTM-905 works on theXT Bus of the DX controller series. Both support the XPx expansion modules that provide the analog, binary, andmultistate inputs and outputs. For a list of XTM and XP modules approved for smoke control, see Table 126.


Figure 100: XTM with Several XPs Attached

Physical FeaturesFigure 101: XTM-105 and XTM-905 Models


Figure 102: XP Models

Wiring









Observe the following guidelines when wiring a field controller:

• Do not run N2 Bus and field wiring in the same conduit as line-voltage wiring (30 VAC or higher) or near wiringthat switches power to highly inductive loads (such as contactors, coils, motors, or generators).

• Hard ground the shield at the UPM enclosure and tape it back at the sensor or contact if using shielded cable.• Terminate wires using the terminal blocks on the upper and lower parts of the modules. A maximum of 1.5 mm²

(16 American Wire Gauge [AWG]) cable is accepted. See the figures in the Wiring Diagrams section for fieldwiring examples. Connect the XT Bus (serial link) cable to the terminals provided on the XTM-905 module.Ground the shield of the cable at one end only. The maximum bus length is 1200 meters (3900 feet), and amaximum of eight XTM-905 modules may be connected. When the bus length is greater than 100 meters (328feet), both ends of the XT Bus must be terminated with end-of-line resistors. When the bus length is less than100 meters (328 feet), only the DX controller end of the bus must be terminated.

To wire all XP modules:



Protection for details.6. Connect power to the XP module.7. Commission the XP module.

Transient ProtectionThe I/O lines of XP modules must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protection kitinstalled when the conduit run that is between the module’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does notremain in the same room. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room require transient protection.The MOV is placed between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal, and I/O terminalof the module. Use the following reference table for installing the Input and Output MOVs per module for both theSMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.


Table 56: XPA, XPB, XPE, XPL, and XPT I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach AI and its corresponding +15Vterminal

+15 VAnalog Input


AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4, AI5, AI6Analog Inputs


AIC (one for each input)Analog Inputs


BI1, BI2, BI3, BI4, BI5, BI6, BI7, BI8Binary Inputs


C (one for each input)Binary Inputs


AO7, AO8Analog Outputs


AOC (one for each output)Analog Outputs


BO1, BO2, BO3, BO4, BO5, BO6, BO7, BO8Binary Outputs



TroubleshootingUse Table 57 to troubleshoot the XTM and XPx modules. If there is a communications fault, check the N2 Buscabling and EOL termination as well as the address setting on the XTM-105. The address setting must be uniqueand agree with the address set on the supervisory system.

Table 57: XTM and XPx LED DescriptionsDescriptionStateLEDGood communication with the supervisory system over the seriallink (N2 Bus). No configuration errors.

On SteadyPWR

Unit has no power.Off

No communication with the supervisory system.Blinking Once per Second

Configuration error or power watchdog error.Blinking Twice per Second

Data communicating over N2 bus.BlinkingRD

No communication.Off

Device responding on N2 bus.BlinkingTD

No communication.Off


Table 57: XTM and XPx LED DescriptionsDescriptionStateLEDInput or output is active; normal operation.On Steady<Point Identifier>

Input or output is not active. Check wiring.Off

SpecificationsTable 58: XTM Technical Specifications

XTM-105-5UL

XTM-905-5UL



Power Requirements



Ambient Conditions

Power Supply: 16 AWG (1.0-1.5 mm²) stranded cable; 16-14 AWG (1.0-.5 mm²)solid cable

N2 Bus: RS-485 cable, 3-wire, 20-16 AWG (.5-1.5 mm²) stranded cable, powerlimited wiring

Module Supply Bus (24 VAC): 5-pin ribbon cable provided with XPx modules

XPx Bus: 5-pin ribbon cable provided with XPx modules

N2 Bus: RS-485; 9600 baud; opto-isolated

Terminations

Power On (flashing = no communication, configuration error, or

power watchdog error.)

Receive Data

Transmit Data

LED Indicators (red)

4.65 in. x 2.76 in. x 2.25 in. (118 x 70 x 57 mm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)5.3 oz. (150 g)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance



Table 59: XPA-821-5 Technical SpecificationsXPA-821-5ULProduct Code NumberPAN-PWRSP-U only: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30 VAC maximum),50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2 (via Module Supply Bus)

Power Requirements

6 VA (nominal) at 50/60 HzPower Consumption15 VDC, 30 mA, power limitedActive Sensor Supply


Table 59: XPA-821-5 Technical SpecificationsOperating: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) 10 to 90% RH, Dry Indoor Environment


Ambient Conditions

Inputs/Outputs: 20-16 AWG (.5-1.5 mm²) stranded cable; 20-14 AWG (.5-2.5mm²) solid cable

Module Supply Bus (24 VAC): 5-pin ribbon cable provided with module, powerwatchdog jumper provided with module

XPx Bus: 5-pin ribbon cable provided with module

Terminations

Six inputs, 10-bit resolution, jumper selectable

• 0-10V, > 300K ohm impedance, Accuracy: +/-100 millivolt (mV), power limited

• 0/4-20 mA, 100 ohm impedance, Accuracy: +/-300 microampere (mA), powerlimited

• RTD (Ni1000, Pt1000, A99), Accuracy: +/-1.8°F (+/-1.0°C), power limited

Analog Inputs

Two outputs, jumper selectable:

• 0-10 VDC, (10 mA), Accuracy: +/- 100 mV, power limited

• 0/4-20 mA, maximum 500 ohm, Accuracy: +/-200 mA, power limited

Analog Outputs

Each output level indicated by two LEDs, one for 0% and one for 100%.

The LEDs are equally bright at 50% output.


4.65 in. x 2.76 in. x 2.25 in. (118 x 70 x 57 mm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)8.4 oz. (237 g)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance



Table 60: XPB-821-5 Technical SpecificationsXPB-821-5ULProduct Code NumberPAN-PWRSP-U only: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30 VAC maximum),50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2 (via Module Supply Bus)

Power Requirements



Ambient Conditions

Inputs: 20-16 AWG (.5-1.5 mm²) stranded cable; 20-14 AWG (.5-2.5 mm²) solidcable



Terminations


Table 60: XPB-821-5 Technical SpecificationsEight binary inputs from potential-free contacts, input resistance 7K ohm, powerlimited. Software configurable as maintained or pulse type. Software configurableas NO or NC for each input. Transition counter function: min. 20 ms On, 20 msOff. Counter maximum = 25 pps or 25 Hz

Binary Inputs

NoneManual OverrideEach input indicated by an LED.LED Indicators4.65 in. x 2.76 in. x 2.25 in. (118 x 70 x 57 mm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)5.8 oz. (163 g)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance



Table 61: XPE-401-5 Technical SpecificationsXPE401-5ULProduct Code NumberPAN-PWRSP-U only: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30 VAC maximum),50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2 (via Module Supply Bus)

Power Requirements



Ambient Conditions




Terminations

Four binary inputs from potential-free contacts, input resistance 7K ohm, powerlimited. Software configurable as maintained or pulse type. Software configurableas N.O. or N.C. for each input. Transition counter function: min. 20 ms On, 20ms Off. Counter maximum = 25 pps or 25 Hz

Binary Inputs

Three binary outputs, electrically latching relays. Contact voltage ratings:

• 24 VAC/70 VA, power limited

• 24 VDC/70W, power limited

Relay Outputs

Three switches (one per BO) for Manual Override operation:

A/0/1 Sets output to Auto or indicated stage in Manual mode.

0 = open

1 = close

Manual Override

Each input indicated by an LED.LED Indicators (green)4.65 in. x 2.76 in. x 2.25 in. (118 x 70 x 57 mm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)5.8 oz. (163 g)Shipping Weight


Table 61: XPE-401-5 Technical SpecificationsUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance



Table 62: XPE-404-5 Technical SpecificationsXPE404-5ULProduct Code NumberPAN-PWRSP-U only: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30 VAC maximum),50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2 (via Module Supply Bus)

Power Requirements



Ambient Conditions




Terminations

Four binary inputs from potential-free contacts, input resistance 7K ohm, powerlimited. Software configuration as maintained or pulse type and as NO or NCfor each input. Transition counter function: min. 20 ms On, 20 ms Off. Countermaximum: 25 pps or 25 Hz.

Binary Inputs

Four binary outputs, electrically latching relays. Software configurable as On/Offor pulse type (5…1275 ms). Contact voltage ratings:



Relay Outputs

Four switches (one per BO) for Manual Override operation:


0 = open

1 = close

Manual Override



Table 62: XPE-404-5 Technical SpecificationsUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance



Table 63: XPL-401-5 Technical SpecificationsXPL401-5ULProduct Code NumberPAN-PWRSP-U only: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30 VAC maximum),50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2 (via Module Supply Bus)

Power Requirements



Ambient Conditions




Terminations


Binary Inputs

Three binary outputs, magnetically latching relays. Contact voltage ratings:



Relay Outputs



0 = open

1 = close

Manual Override



Table 63: XPL-401-5 Technical SpecificationsUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance



Table 64: XPT-401-5 Technical SpecificationsXPT401-5ULProduct Code NumberPAN-PWRSP-U only: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30 VAC maximum),50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2 (via Module Supply Bus)

Power Requirements



Ambient Conditions




Terminations


Binary Inputs

Four binary outputs, triacs. 24 VAC/500 mA, power limited.

Software configurable as On/Off or Pulse Type (5…1275 ms).

Triac Outputs



0 = open

1 = close

Manual Override

Each input indicated by an LED.LED Indicators (green)4.65 in. x 2.76 in. x 2.25 in. (118 x 70 x 57 mm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)5.8 oz. (163 g)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance




Table 65: XPT-861-5 Technical SpecificationsXPT861-5ULProduct Code Number5 VDC power from XTM-105 via ribbon cablePower RequirementsOperating:+32 to +122°F (+0 to + 50°C) 10 to 90% RH

Storage:-40 to 158°F (-40° to + 70°C) 5 to 95% RH

Ambient Conditions

Outputs: 20-16 AWG (.5-1.5 mm²) stranded cable; 20-14 AWG (.5-2.5 mm²)solid cable


Note: 24 VAC is not used, but must be connected.


Terminations

Eight binary outputs, triacs. 24 VAC/500 mA, power limited.

Software configurable as On/Off or Pulse Type (5…1275 ms).

Triac Outputs

NoneManual OverrideEach input indicated by an LED.LED Indicators (green)4.65 in. x 2.76 in. x 2.25 in. (118 x 70 x 57 mm)Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)5.8 oz. (163 g)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, EnergyManagement Equipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, ClassA


Compliance





Figure 103: UL/cUL Label Placement for XTM and XP Modules

UNT100 ControllersThe Unitary Controller (UNT100 Series) is a versatile digital controller for packaged (rooftop) air handling units, unitventilators, fan coils, heat pumps, and other terminal units. It can also be configured as a generic input/output devicefor basic point monitoring applications when used within aMetasysNetwork. For a list of supported UNT100 controllers,see Table 126.

Figure 104: UNT110 Unitary Controller


Figure 105: UNT114 Unitary Controlller

Physical FeaturesFigure 106: UNT11xx Physical Features


Wiring









To wire all UNT controller models:



Protection for details.6. Connect power to the UNT controller.7. Commission the UNT controller.

Transient ProtectionThe I/O lines of the UNT controller must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protectionkit installed when the conduit run that is between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does notremain in the same room. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requires transient protection.The MOV is placed between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal, and I/O terminalof the controller. Use the following reference table for installing the Input and Output MOVs per field controller forboth the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.


Table 66: UNT110 and UNT141 I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach AI and its corresponding +30Vterminal

+30 VAnalog Input






BI1, BI2, BI3, BI4, BI5, BI6Binary Inputs



TroubleshootingUse the following tables to troubleshoot the UNT controllers. If you detect communication problems, a noisy wireadjacent to the Zone Bus can cause this behavior. Noise can be periodically induced into the Zone Bus causingsporadic communication failures between the laptop and the UNT. Most often, noisy lines cause intermittent disruption,not total loss of communication.

Table 67: UNT Series Controller TroubleshootingActionPossible CauseSymptomInstall EOL jumpers and W3 jumperproperly.

EOL jumpers and/or W3 jumper on MM-CVT101or

Companion Panel/LTD are not installed.

N2 Bus is Offline

Plug MM-CVT101 into PC or into a 9 VDCsource.

MM-CVT101 is not plugged into PC or 9 VDCsource.

Rewire N2 Bus wires for proper polarity.N2 Bus polarity is incorrect.

Change each duplicate UNT address to aunique number.

Two or more UNTs have the same address.UNT Does Not Come Online

Cycle power on the UNT.The address of the UNT was changed without itspower being cycled afterward.

Wait until the delay expires.The 10-second delay after downloading the UNThas not yet expired (HVAC PRO™ Revision 1.0or earlier).

Wait until the Zone Bus is clear, then tryagain.

Someone is commissioning over the Zone Bus.

Table 68: UNT Series Controller: Zone Bus LED DescriptionsGreen LED (Comm)

No power to UNT.OffZone Bus wire shorted to common or 24 VAC.OnNormal communication.Blinking


Table 69: UNT Series Controller: CBLCON LED DescriptionsCauseGreen LED (Comm)Red LED (Power)No power to UNT.OffOffZone Bus wire open.OffOnZone Bus wire shorted to common or CBLCON-0 switch indownload position

OnOn

Normal communication.BlinkingOn

SpecificationsTable 70: UNT Series Technical Specifications

AS-UNT110-101YK-UNT110-1AS-UNT110-1Product Code NumbersAS-UNT1008-0YK-UNT1108-0AS-UNT1108-0

AS-UNT1044-0AS-UNT1026-0AS-UNT1008-0A1

AS-UNT111-101YK-UNT111-1AS-UNT111-1

AS-UNT113-1AS-UNT112-1YK-UNT111-101

CC-UNT1126-0S01YK-UNT1126-0AS-UNT1126-0

AS-UNT120-1YK-UNT1144-0AS-UNT1144-0

AS-UNT140-101AS-UNT140-1AS-UNT121-1

AS-UNT220-1FA-UNT141-1

PAN-PWRSP-U or PAN-96VAXFR-U: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VAC minimum/30 VACmaximum), 50/60 Hz, power supply Class 2

Power Requirements



Ambient Conditions

Power Supply: 16 AWG (1.0-1.5 mm²) stranded cable; 16-14 AWG (1.0-.5 mm²) solidcable

N2 Bus: RS-485 cable, 3-wire, 20-16 AWG (.5-1.5 mm²) stranded cable, power limitedwiring

Module Supply Bus (24 VAC): 5-pin ribbon cable provided with XPx modules

XPx Bus: 5-pin ribbon cable provided with XPx modules

N2 Bus: RS-485; 9600 baud; opto-isolated

Terminations

Power On (flashing = no communication, configuration error, or

power watchdog error.)

Receive Data

Transmit Data



Table 70: UNT Series Technical SpecificationsAS-UNT110-1, AS-UNT111-1, AS-UNT112-1, AS-UNT113-1, AS-UNT140-1,AS-UNT141-1:

165 x 163 x 56 mm (6.5. x 6.4 x 2.2 in.) without enclosure

173 x 185 x 119 mm (6.8 x 7.3 x 4.7 in.) with enclosure

AS-UNT120-1, AS-UNT121-1:

165 x 163 x 56 mm (6.5 x 6.4 x 2.2 in.) without enclosure

259 x 248 x 76 mm (10.2 x 9.8 x 3 in.) with enclosure

AS-UNT110-101, AS-UNT111-101, AS-UNT140-101, AS-UNT141-101:

7 x 13 x 6 in. (180 x 330 x 150 mm without enclosure

Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)

1.4 lbs (.64 kg)Shipping WeightUnited States: UL 916 Listed, Energy Management Equipment, FCC Compliant toCFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, Smoke Control Unitsand Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems Equipment

Compliance


UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 10th Edition Listed, Smoke ControlUnits and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems



Figure 107: UL/cUL Label Placement for AS-UNT Controllers (Controller Inside Enclosure)

VAV100 ControllersThe Variable Air Volume Box (VAV100 Series) Controller is specifically designed for digital control of single duct,dual duct, fan-powered, and supply/exhaust VAV box configurations. The controller can provide standalone controlof the VAV box, and can also integrate control of baseboard heat and lighting logic for the room or zone. For a listof VAV100 controllers approved for smoke control, see Table 126.


Figure 108: VAV Variable Air Volume Box Controllers

Physical FeaturesFigure 109: VAV 110 Series Controller


Table 71: VAV110 Physical FeaturesPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutDevice Address DIP Switch Block.1Analog Input Configuration Switches. Can be defined as Voltage Analog Input (0–2 VDC or 0–10 VDC) or ResistiveAnalog Inputs (0–600k ohm).

2

Six Analog Inputs (UI) Spade Lugs.3Four Binary Input (BI) Spade Lugs. Dry Contact Maintained or Pulse Counter/Accumulator Mode.424 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power Terminal Block (PAN-PWRSP-U only).5Zone Bus Modular Jack Connection.6N2 Bus Terminal Block.7Six Binary Output (BO) Spade Lugs. 24 VAC triac switched, 25-500 mA loads.8Two Analog Output (AO) Spade Lugs. 0-10 VDC at 10 mA maximum.9

Wiring









To wire all VAV controller models:


SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit for details.


5. Add SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U transient protectors to all I/O terminal connections. See Field Controller I/O TransientProtection for details.

6. Connect power to the VAV controller.7. Commission the VAV controller.

Transient ProtectionThe I/O lines of the VAV controller must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protectionkit installed when the conduit run that is between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does notremain in the same room. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requires transient protection.The MOV is placed between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal, and I/O terminalof the controller. Use the following reference table for installing the Input and Output MOVs per field controller forboth the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.

Table 72: VAV100 Series I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach AI and its corresponding +30Vterminal

+30 VAnalog Input


AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4, AI5, AI6, AI7, AI8Analog Inputs




BI1, BI2, BI3, BI4Binary Inputs








BO1, BO2, BO3, BO4, BO5, BO6, BO7, BO8Binary Outputs



TroubleshootingUse the following tables to troubleshoot the VAV controllers. If you detect communication problems, a noisy wireadjacent to the Zone Bus can cause this behavior. Noise can be periodically induced into the Zone Bus causingsporadic communication failures between the laptop and the VAV. Most often, noisy lines cause intermittent disruption,not total loss of communication.


Table 73: VAV Series Controller TroubleshootingActionPossible CauseSymptomInstall EOL jumpers and W3 jumperproperly.

EOL jumpers and/or W3 jumper on MM-CVT101or

Companion Panel/LTD are not installed.

N2 Bus is Offline

Plug MM-CVT101 into PC or into a 9 VDCsource.

MM-CVT101 is not plugged into PC or 9 VDCsource.

Rewire N2 Bus wires for proper polarity.N2 Bus polarity is incorrect.

Change each duplicate VAV address to aunique number.

Two or more VAVs have the same address.VAV Does Not Come Online

Cycle power on the VAV.The address of the VAV was changed without itspower being cycled afterward.

Wait until VAV the delay expires.The 10-second delay after downloading the VAVhas not yet expired (HVAC PRO™ Revision 1.0or earlier).

Wait until the Zone Bus is clear, then tryagain.

Someone is commissioning over the Zone Bus.

Table 74: VAV Series Controller: Zone Bus LED DescriptionsGreen LED (Comm)

No power to VAV.OffZone Bus wire shorted to common or 24 VAC.OnNormal communication.Blinking

Table 75: VAV Series Controller: CBLCON LED DescriptionsCauseGreen LED (Comm)Red LED (Power)No power to VAV.OffOffZone Bus wire open.OffOnZone Bus wire shorted to common or CBLCON-0 switch indownload position

OnOn

Normal communication.BlinkingOn


orDescription

Check for missing N2 wire or tight andproper connections between the laptop,AS-CBLPRO-2, and the VAV.

The device is being sent amessage that contains an invalidcommand.

Undefined Command1

Try a different AS-CBLPRO-2 or use a CVTon the N2 Bus.

The size of the message sentdoes not correspond to the typeof message sent.

Invalid Message Size5

Check for tight and proper connectionsbetween the laptop, AS-CBLPRO-2, andthe VAV.

The command issued is not validfor the data type.

Invalid Command11



orDescription

Cycle power on the VAV. If problempersists, return VAV for repair orreplacement.

The VAV cannot process thismessage at this time. Forexample, the EEPROM is notfunctioning properly.

Not Ready14

Return the VAV for repair or replacement.The VAV detected a problem withthe EEPROM.

Bad E2 Write15

Check for missing N2 wire or tight andproper connections between the laptop,AS-CBLPRO-2, and the VAV.

Some hardware problem exists,such as a loose connection or afailed component.

No Communication16

Wait ten seconds for the reset period toexpire before trying to commission thecontroller.

Controller is still in reset mode.Resetting takes ten seconds aftera download.


The Cyclical Redundancy Checkof the message received isincorrect due to an error intransmission.

Bad CRC17


Themessage received is not whatthe HVACPRO forWindows Loadutility expected.

InvalidResponse18

Reset the AI jumper into the proper “C”position.

The power up sequenceconstantly repeats on the VAV.

AI jumper improperly set to the “T” or “V” position.

Fix the voltage level.Voltage to the AIs is greater than10.3 VDC or less than -0.7 VDC.

SpecificationsTable 77: VAV Series Technical Specifications

AS-VAV111-1AS-VAV110-1DAS-VAV110-1Product Code NumbersAS-VAV140-1AS-VAV111-1MAS-VAV111-1D

FA-VAV141-1AS-VAV141-1FA-VAV140-1

AS-VAVDPT2-1


Power Requirements

VAV with sensors/transmitters: 10 VA (400 mA)Power ConsumptionOperating: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) 10 to 90% RH, Dry Indoor Environment


Ambient Conditions

Intel 80C652 @ 11 MHzProcessor8 bitWord Size8k bytes (2k bytes for VAV 100/101)EEPROM Size64k bytesROM/EPROM Size8k bytesRAM SizeN2 and Zone BusInterfaces


Table 77: VAV Series Technical Specifications

8 Analog Inputs (0-10 VDC)

4 Binary Inputs

0/2 Analog Outputs (0-10 VDC)

8/6 Binary Outputs (24 VAC Triacs)

Inputs/Outputs

6.5 x 6.4 x 2.2 in./165 x 163 x 56 mm without enclosure

6.8 x 7.3 x 4.7 in./173 x 185 x 119 mm with the AS-ENC100-0 enclosure


1.4 lbs (.64 kg)Shipping WeightIEEE 472

IEEE 518

IEEE 587 Category A

VDE 0871 Class B

Compliance

United States: UL 916 Listed PAZX, Energy Management Equipment, FCCCompliant Part 15, Subpart J, Class A






Figure 110: UL/cUL Label Placement for AS-VAV100 Controllers (Controller Inside Enclosure)

VMA1400 ControllersThe Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly (VMA1400) Series is a family of configurable digital controllers. Eachmodel in the VMA1400 Series combines a controller, pressure sensor, and/or actuator housed in one preassembledunit. Some VMA models are designed for pressure-independent, single duct systems. Others can be used withparallel or series fan-powered boxes, supply/exhaust applications, and dual duct systems. For a list of VMA1400controllers approved for smoke control, see Table 126.


Figure 111: AP-VMA1430-0 Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly


Physical FeaturesFigure 112: VMA1430 Controller

Wiring










To wire all VMA1400 controller models:



Protection for details.6. Connect power to the VMA controller.7. Commission the VMA controller.

Transient ProtectionThe I/O lines of the VMA1400 controller must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transientprotection kit installed when the conduit run that is between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field devicedoes not remain in the same room. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requires transientprotection. The MOV is placed between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal, andI/O terminal of the controller. Use the following reference table for installing the Input and Output MOVs per fieldcontroller for both the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.

Table 78: VMA1400 Series I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach AI and its corresponding +30Vterminal

+30 VAnalog Input






BI1, BI2, BI3, BI4, BI5, BI6Binary Inputs




Table 78: VMA1400 Series I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground for each output





BO1, BO2, BO3, BO4, BO5Binary Outputs



TroubleshootingUse Table 117 to troubleshoot the VMA1400 controllers.

Table 79: VMA1400 Series Controller Status Light-Emitting Diodes LEDDescriptions of LED StatesLED StateNo power, or 15 VDC power is shorted.OffSerious problem with the VMA. If on steady for longer than 20 seconds, replace the VMA.On Steady (Not Blinking)Communication with the VMA and the network engine is normal.Blinking Irreguarly Every 4

SecondsThe VMA is offline. Verify N2 address switches; look for shorts, crossed wires, and groundloops.

Blinking Once per Second

The VMA memory is corrupted. Download the firmware code into the controller.Blinking Rapidly

SpecificationsTable 80: VMA1400 Series Technical Specifications

AP-VMA1420-0AP-VMA1410-0Product Code NumbersAP-VMA1440-0AP-VMA1430-0


Power Requirements

VMA1410/1420/1440: 10 VAmaximum (Relay and valve requirements not included.)

VMA1430: 3 VA maximum (Damper actuator, relay, and valve requirements notincluded.)

Power Consumption

0.6 ampere for VMA1410; 2.0 amperes for a VMA1420 and 1440; 1.2 amperes forVMA1430

Optional Fuse Current

+32 to +122°F (0 to +50°C) 10 to 90% RHAmbient Operating Conditions-40 to 158°F (-40° to + 70°C) 10to 90% RHAmbient Storage Conditions6.3 mm (1/4 in.) spade lugs (Communication has screw terminals.)TerminationsN2 and Zone BusInterfacesPlastic housing for controller/actuator with UL94-5VB Plenum Flammability RatingHousing4 N·m (35 lb·in) minimum (VMA1410/1420/1440 only)Actuator Torque


Table 80: VMA1400 Series Technical SpecificationsN2 and Zone BusInterfacesAnalog Inputs:

Nickel, silicon, platinum (1 K ohm), or NTC (2.25 K) RTD room sensors, 1.6 Ksetpoint potentiometer (2-wire)

Voltage input for 0-10 VDC (humidity or pressure sensor)

Binary Inputs: Dry contacts

Input configurations vary based on model type.

Inputs

No outputs on VMA1410 (internal stepper motor)

Binary outputs, 24 VAC triac switched, 25-500 mA loads

Stepper drive, 2 to 767 steps per second (23,000 step resolution)(VMA1410/1420/1440 only)

Analog output, 0-10 VDC @ 10 mA maximum

Outputs

Velocity Pressure for 374 Pascal (0-1.5 in. W.C.)Velocity PressureVMA1410/1420/1440: 153 x 102 x 102 mm (6 x 4 x 4 in.)

VMA1430: 153 x 102 x 83 mm (6 x 4 x 3.25 in.)


VMA1410/1420/1440: 13.1 kg (29 lb) for a box of ten, 1.3 kg (2.8 lb) each

VMA1430: 5 kg (11.02 lb) for a box of ten, 0.5 kg (1.06 lb) each

Shipping Weight

CSA 22.2 No. 205, UL 916, UL 94-5VB, FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A and B,C-tick Australia/NZ, AS/NZS 4251.1, CISPR 22, Class B, CE Directive (89/336/EEC,EN50081-1, EN50082-2) Industrial, IEEE 472, IEEE518, IEEE587 Category A/B,IEC-950, IEC 801-2, -3, -4, -6, -7, -8, ANSI C62.41 A/B

Compliance

United States: UL 916 Listed PAZX, Energy Management Equipment, FCCCompliant Part 15, Subpart J, Class A






Figure 113: UL/cUL Label Placement for AP-VMA14xx Controller

MS/TP Bus

MS/TP Bus OverviewThe BACnet® protocol MS/TP communications bus is a local network that connects supervisory controllers and fieldcontrollers to field point interfaces. The bus is based on BACnet® standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.

The BACnet MS/TP protocol is a peer-to-peer, multiple master protocol based on token passing. Only master devicescan receive the token, and only the device holding the token is allowed to originate a message on the bus. The tokenis passed from master device to master device using a small message. The token is passed in consecutive orderstarting with the lowest address. Lower-level devices on the bus only communicate on the bus when responding toa data request from a master device.

Important: Do not connect MS/TP devices and N2 devices to the same bus. MS/TP communications busesfollow different protocol and wiring rules from N2 communications buses, and MS/TP devices and N2devices are not compatible on the same bus.

An MS/TP bus (Figure 114) is used for two types of buses: a Field Controller bus (FC) and a Sensor Actuator (SA)bus. The MS/TP bus can also be extended remotely over the IP network with the addition of a BACnet IP to MS/TProuter.


The FC Bus and SA bus are networks of daisy-chained devices. Each bus has only one bus supervisor, dependingon which controllers are connected. On a local FC bus, the bus supervisor is the network engine. On the local SAbus, the bus supervisor is a field controller.

The bus supervisor communicates with devices on the supervised bus and with devices on the next (higher level)bus on the network. The bus supervisor typically starts the communication on the FC bus or SA bus. If an SA busor FC bus does not have a bus supervisor, the master device with the lowest device address value on the bus anda specific baud rate selected starts the communication.

FC Bus ExampleAn FC bus connects aMetasys® system network engine to FACs, FECs, VMA16s, IOMs, and TECSeries thermostats.Only smoke control listed BACnet MS/TP devices can be connected to the FC bus.

Figure 114: Example of an MS/TP Communications Bus

SA Bus ExampleThe SA bus connects NCEs, FACs, FECs, and VMA16s (field controllers) to end point devices such as IOMs, networkthermostats, network sensors, and DIS Local Controller Displays.

On an SA bus, an NCE, FAC, FEC, or VMA16 is the bus supervisor. The SA bus is a private MS/TP bus that onlysupports those devices that can be defined using the CCT programming tool. The SA bus supports only one bussegment (Figure 115). See SA Bus Rules and Specifications for more information.


Figure 115: Example of an SA Bus

Local FC Bus Rules and SpecificationsTable 81, Table 82, and Figure 116 provide rules and specifications for the local FC bus. Metasys MS/TP devicesgenerate less data traffic than third-party MS/TP devices and TEC thermostats. Connecting third-party devices orTEC thermostats to the FC bus increases data traffic, reduces bus performance, and reduces the number of devicesthat can be connected to the FC bus.

Table 81: Local FC Bus Rules and LimitationsRules/LimitsCategoryNAE55 Series models can support up to two local FC buses.

Notes:

• When a second FC bus is added to the NAE, be sure the trunk number has not beenused on the NAE and enter a Network Address that is unique for the entire site. Thisapplies for any model of NAE.

• An FC port on an NAE can connect to only one bus segment on an FC bus. Only adaisy-chain topology is allowed (no T or Star topology configurations).

• Refer to the Network Engines Product Bulletin (LIT-12012138) and the Network ControlEngine Product Bulletin (LIT-12011283) for complete information on MS/TP bus supporton NAE models.

General

NAE55 Series models support the following device limits on an FC bus trunk:

When all of the devices connected on the FC bus areMetasys FACs, FECs, VMA16s, and/orIOMs, the device and bus segment limits are as follows:

• 100 devices total per FC bus (maximum)• 2 bus segments per FC bus (maximum)• 50 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 100 devices per FC bus)

When one or more non-FEC family device is connected on the FC bus, the device and bussegment limits are as follows:• 64 devices total per FC bus (maximum)• 2 bus segments per FC bus (maximum)• 32 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 64 devices per FC bus)

Number of Devices and BusSegments

Bus segments on an FC bus are connected with a repeater (only). One repeater may beapplied to an FC bus to connect two bus segments.


Table 81: Local FC Bus Rules and LimitationsRules/LimitsCategoryWhen all of the devices connected on the FC bus are Metasys FACs, FECs, VMA16s, orIOMs, the cable length limits (using 22 AWG 3-wire twisted, shielded cable) are as follows:• Each bus segment can be up to 1,520 m (5,000 ft) in length.• Each FC bus can be up to 4,750 m (15,000 ft) in length.

When one or more non-FEC family device is connected on the FC bus, the device and bussegment limits are as follows:• Each bus segment can be up to 1,220 m (4,000 ft)1 in length.• Each FC bus can be up to 3,660 m (12,000 ft)1 in length.

Note: Do not place lower-level devices on the FC bus. Lower-level devices on the FC busare not supported.

Cable Length for FC Bus andBus Segments

When using fiber-optic connections: 2,010 m (6,600 ft)1 between two media converters.

22 AWG Stranded, 3-Wire Twisted, Shielded CableRecommended Cable2

The EOL switch must be set toOn (or an EOL terminator installed) on the two devices locatedat either end of each bus segment on an FC bus. The EOL switches must be set to Off (orEOL termination disabled) for all other devices on the bus segment on an FC bus. SeeEnd-of-Line Termination on Local FC Bus for more information.

EOL Termination

1 If third-party devices are connected to the bus, the cable lengths should be reduced (if necessary) to match the third-partyvendor recommendations.

2 The recommended cable type provides the best bus performance. SeeMS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations for informationon alternative cable types and lengths that may be used in MS/TP applications.

Figure 116: FC Bus with Two Bus Segments Connected with Repeaters

The bus segments on an FC bus are connected using repeaters (only). A repeater has two device connections,which are independent of each other. Each device connection on the repeater is connected to a bus segment justlike any other device connection on the segment, and a repeater device connection can be connected at the end ofa bus segment or anywhere along the segment. When a repeater device connection is at the end of a bus segment,EOL termination must be enabled on that repeater device connection. See Figure 121 for more examples of repeaterson FC buses.


Table 82: FC Bus SpecificationsSpecificationCategoryMessage Headers checked using 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) test.Message data check using 16-bit CRC test.

Error Checking

0–255 (See Device Addressing on the MS/TP Bus for more information.)Device AddressingRS485Data Transmission StandardBACnet® MS/TPSignaling Method9600, 19,200, 38,400, or 76,800 baud as selected by bus supervisor. (See BaudRates on the MS/TP Bus.)

Signaling Rate

Meets EN61000-4-4 and EN6100-4-5 requirements for heavy industrialapplications.

Protected against misapplication of 24 VAC.

Transient Immunity

Integral EOL Termination switch or add-on EOL Terminator module (SeeEnd-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP Bus.) Do not use third-party EOLtermination.

EOL Termination Method

Only one hard ground connection per bus segment when using shielded cable.(See Grounding the MS/TP Bus Cable Shield.)

Shield Grounding

Daisy-chainedPhysical ConfigurationRepeaters• NU-RPT101-U (115 VAC)• NU-RPT24-U (24 VAC)

Note: A repeater is required to support more than 50 devices per trunk segmentor trunk cable segment longer than 1,524m (5,000 ft). Only the repeaterslisted here provide EOL termination switching that is compatible withMS/TP.

Fiber Optic Switches• CCSI CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT switch• CCSI CTRLink EIMK-100T/FT media converter

Optional Vendor Components

Baud Rates on the MS/TP BusAn MS/TP bus can be configured to communicate at one of four different baud rates. All of the devices on an MS/TPbus must communicate at the same baud rate.

The baud rate setting determines the rate at which devices communicate data over the bus. The baud rate settingsavailable onMetasysMS/TP devices are 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, 76.8 kbps, and Auto. The baud rate settingfor Metasys devices is set in the Metasys software.

Note: The BACnet Standard only requires support for 9600 baud. Some third-party vendor devices might not supportall the baud rates supported by theMetasys system. Reducing the baud rate to accommodate these devicesaffects overall performance.

We recommend setting all MS/TP bus supervisors (NAEs, NCEs, and BACnet Routers) to 38,400.

We recommend setting all field controllers on the FC bus or Remote Field Bus (FACs, FECs, VMA16s, and IOMs)to Auto. In the Auto setting, theMetasys devices listen for the bus supervisor to communicate first; the devices thenautomatically set their baud rate to the bus supervisor’s baud rate. FACs, FECs, VMA16s, and IOMs ship with adefault baud rate setting of Auto.

If you anticipate critical peer-to-peer communication and therefore do not want field controllers to wait for the bussupervisor to establish the baud rate, you can specify the baud rate for each device immediately at startup. Choosethe baud rate carefully if you use this method, since changing it requires changing each device separately.


Typically, the baud rate setting on bus repeaters and third-party MS/TP devices is configured manually at the device,and the baud rate setting must match the bus supervisor’s baud rate. A third-party device that does not supportauto-baud establishes the baud rate for the MS/TP network if the NxE is not connected. Refer to the manufacturer’sproduct documentation for information on setting the device’s baud rate.

The Metasys software contains the following two device attributes that relate to the baud rate:

• Baud Rate Selection allows you to set the baud rate for the device using the System Configuration Tool (SCT)for NAEs, or the Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) for FACs, FECs, VMA16s, and IOMs.

• Active Baud Rate allows you to view the baud rate at which the device is communicating on the active bus whenAuto baud is selected for the device.

For more information on Metasys system attributes, refer to the Metasys system Help (LIT-1201793).

The high baud rates capable on MS/TP buses limit the range of wire gauges used on the bus. The baud rate, wiregauge, wire length, and the number of devices are related. Higher baud rates support more devices but require smallgauge wire that provides lower capacitance. A lower baud rate may be required to use existing, larger gauge wirethat has higher capacitance, but may support fewer devices. We recommend 38,400 baud using 22 AWG strandedwire. This combination provides the best balance between performance and installation sensitivity.

For information on determining wire gauges, wire lengths, and the number of devices supported, see MS/TP BusCable Recommendations.

MS/TP Bus Cable RecommendationsThe MS/TP bus supports much higher baud rates than the N2 bus. Higher baud rates make the MS/TP bus lessfault tolerant and less immune to interference from inductive noise sources that may be present in the applicationenvironment.

For the best performance on MS/TP bus applications, use 22 AWG stranded wire in a shielded cable with propercable shield grounding. This recommendation applies to both local and Remote Field Bus installations. Other wiregauges and non-shielded cablemay provide acceptable bus performance in many applications, especially applicationsthat have short cable runs and low ambient inductive noise levels.

Table 83 provides cable recommendations for MS/TP applications. The recommended FC bus and SA bus cablesare available from Belden CDT Inc. and Anixter, Inc.

Alternative cables may be used in MS/TP applications. Table 84 provides information regarding the relationshipbetween baud rate, wire gauge, wire length, and supported device numbers. You can also use the informationprovided in Table 84 to determine if existing cable runs may be used in a retrofit or upgrade MS/TP application.

Note: In Table 83, the shielded bus and cable types are recommended; the non-shielded bus and cable types areacceptable.

Table 83: Cable for FC Buses and SA Buses in Order of PreferencePlenum ApplicationsNon-Plenum ApplicationsBus and Cable Type

O.D.Part NumberO.D.Part Number0.140 in.Anixter: CBL-22/3-FC-PLN

Belden: B6501FE

0.138 in.Anixter:CBL-22/3-FC-PVC

Belden®: B5501FE

FC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded,3-Wire Twisted ShieldedCable1

0.206 in.Anixter: CBL-22/2P-SA-PLN

Belden: B6541FE

0.209 in.Anixter:CBL-22/2P-SA-PVC

Belden: B5541FE

SA Bus (Terminal Block):22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire,2 Twisted-Pair ShieldedCable1


Table 83: Cable for FC Buses and SA Buses in Order of Preference0.15 in.Anixter preassembled:

CBL-NETWORK25

CBL-NETWORK50

CBL-NETWORK75

CBL-NETWORK100

——SA Bus (Modular Jack):26 AWG Solid 6-Wire,3 Twisted-Pair Cable2

0.131 in.Belden: B6501UE0.135 in.Belden: B5501UEFC Bus: 22 AWG Stranded,3-Wire Twisted Non-ShieldedCable

0.199 in.Belden: B6541UE0.206 in.Belden: B5541UESA Bus (Terminal Block):22 AWG Stranded, 4-Wire,2 Twisted-Pair Non-ShieldedCable

1 We strongly recommend 3-wire (for FC bus) and 4-wire, 2 twisted-pair (for SA bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable. A 22gauge cable offers the best performance for various baud rates, cable distances, and number of trunk devices primarily dueto lower conductor-to-conductor capacitance. Shielded cable offers better overall electrical noise immunity than non-shieldedcable. Observe the shield grounding requirements.

2 We recommend 26 AWG solid, 6-wire (3 twisted pairs) cable as the best fit for fabricating modular cables with the modularjack housing assembly. Be sure the cable you use fits the modular jack housing. The preassembled cables that are availablefrom Anixter (Part No. CBL-NETWORKxxx) use 24 gauge wire.

Table 84: FC Bus Wire Gauge and FC Bus Baud RateBaud RateMaximum Cable Length and

Node Connections LimitAWG WireGauge

76,800 338,400 219,200 19600 1

305(1,000)

(NR)

609(2,000)

(NR)

1,219(4,000)

(NR)

1,219(4,000)

(NR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

Maximum Cable Length perBus Segment (m [ft])

18

50/100

(NR)

10/30

(NR)

50/100

(NR)

40/100

(NR)

50/50

(APR)

25/25

(APR)

Maximum Number of Nodes(per Segment / per FC Bus)

1,219(4,000)

(NR)

1,524(5,000)

(NR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)


20

50/100

(NR)

40/100

(NR)

50/100

(APR)

50/50

(APR)

25/25

(APR)


1,524 (5,000)

(A)

1,524 (5,000)

(Best)

1,524 (5,000)

(A)

1,524 (5,000)

(A)


22

50/100

(A)

50/100

(Best)

50/50

(A)

25/25

(A)


1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)


24

50/100

(APR)

50/100

(APR)

50/50

(APR)

25/25

(APR)



Table 84: FC Bus Wire Gauge and FC Bus Baud Rate1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)

1,524 (5,000)

(APR)


26

50/100

(APR)

50/100

(APR)

50/50

(APR)

25/25

(APR)


A = Acceptable

APR = Acceptable with Possible Restrictions

NR = Not Recommended

1 The maximum number of devices is reduced at lower baud rates due to increased token loop times.2 3-wire conductor (FC Bus), 22 AWG stranded, shielded cable is recommended. 22 gauge cable offers the best performance

for various baud rates, cable distances, and number of trunk devices primarily due to lower conductor-to-conductor capacitance.Shielded cable offers better overall electrical noise immunity than non-shielded cable.

3 The MS-NAE55xx-0 cannot communicate at 76,800 baud.

SA Bus Rules and SpecificationsThe SA bus connects IOMs and NS-Series network sensors to field controllers. Figure 122 shows three SA busexamples. Table 85 and Table 86 provide SA bus rules and specifications.


Table 85: SA Bus RulesRules/LimitsCategoryEach bus supervisor supports one SA Bus (and each SA Bus is a single segment).GeneralAn SA Bus supports up to 10 devices. The SA bus supervisor providespower for all lower-level devices connected to the SA bus, including up tofour NS network sensors. IOMs connected to the SA bus are not poweredby the bus supervisor.

Note: Exceeding the SA bus power limit can result in devices going offline andpoor bus performance. See SA Bus Device Limits for more informationon SA bus power limits.The recommendation of placing no more than 4 NS Series devices ona given SA Bus is primarily limited due to COV transmit rateconsiderations. If the COV transmit rate of a combined bus is maintainedbelow 500/minute, it may be possible to place more than 4 NS Seriesdevices on a given bus. If more than 4 NS Series devices are placed ona combined bus and SA Bus performance degrades, it is likely due tothe amount of existing bus traffic and a different application may berequired. Three factors must be considered when determining howmanyNS network sensors you can add:

1) Available device addresses -• The limit for standard NS Series wall mounted sensors is 5. Using

4 addressable models and a single static address (199) model, 5devices can fit on a single SA Bus. Flush mount (NS-FTN7003-x)sensors use the same address range.

• The limit for NS Series DA-T (NS-DTN70x3-0) sensors on the busis 8. The number of available dip switch addresses is from 204 to211.

• The limit for NS Series CO2 (NS-BCN7004-x) sensors on the bus is8. The number of available dip switch addresses is 212 to 219.

2) Power consumption - The amount of power available is determinedby which models are chosen for the application. See SA Bus DeviceLimits.

3) Trunk traffic - anything over 500 COV transmits per minute isconsidered excessive.

Number of Devices Supported on the SABus

SA Buses do not support repeaters.

365 m (1,200 ft) maximum bus lengthCable Length152 m (500 ft) maximum distance between an NS network sensor and the bussupervisor (FAC, FEC, or VMA16 supplying power to the sensor) using bus cableconnected to the SA Bus screw terminal blocks

30 m (100 ft) maximum length for network sensors using bus cables connectedto the RJ-Style modular jack (6-Pin SA Bus Port)

366 m (1,200 ft) maximum bus length

Screw Terminal Connections: 22 AWG Stranded 4-wire, 2-Twisted Pairs,Shielded Cable for screw terminals.

Modular Jack Connections: 6-Pin RJ-Style Modular Connectors with 24 or 26AWG Solid 6-Wire, 3 Twisted-Pairs

Recommended Cable Type1


Table 85: SA Bus RulesRules/LimitsCategoryEach SA bus supervisor has integral (fixed ON) EOL termination, which typicallyprovides sufficient EOL termination on an SA bus. Long SA bus runs or persistentcommunication problems on an SA bus may require EOL termination at the lastdevice on the SA bus (in addition to the integral EOL termination at the SA bussupervisor).

EOL Termination

Do not mix RJ-style modular (phone) jack devices and screw terminal deviceson the SA bus.

Mixing Device Types

1 The recommended cable types provide the best bus performance. SeeMS/TP Bus Cable Recommendations for informationon alternative cable types.

Table 86: SA Bus SpecificationsSpecificationCategoryMessage Headers checked using 8-bit CRC test.

Message data check using 16-bit CRC test.

Error Checking

0–255 (See Device Addressing on the MS/TP Bus for more information.)Device AddressingRS485Data Transmission StandardBACnet® MS/TPSignaling Method9600; 19,200; 38,400 (default); or 76,800 baud as selected by the bus supervisorSignaling RateMeets EN61000-4-4 and EN6100-4-5 requirements for heavy industrialapplications. Protected against misapplication of 24 VAC.

Transient Immunity

One hard ground per bus segment when using shielded cableShield GroundingDaisy-chained (screw terminal only).Physical Configuration

SA Bus Device LimitsThe SA Bus is limited to 10 devices total to ensure good communication on the bus and is limited to four NS sensorsbecause only four unique addresses can be set on the sensors. Due to change of value (COV) limitations, it is bestto limit the number of IOMs on the SA Bus to four. The SA bus is also limited by the total power consumption of thedevices connected on the bus. Exceeding the total power consumption limit can cause poor bus communication andcause devices to go offline.

The following table provides the power consumption of devices commonly connected to the SA bus.Important: The total power consumption for the SA Bus is limited to 210 mA on the SA Bus modular jack and 240

mA on the SA Bus terminal block. Exceeding the total power consumption limit can cause poor buscommunication and cause devices to go offline.

Table 87: Power Consumption by Common SA Bus DevicesPower Consumption on the SA BusSA Bus Device12 mADischarge Air Sensors (NS-DTN70x3-0)25 mABalancing Sensors (NS-ATV7003-0)13 mANetwork Sensors without display21 mANetwork Sensors with display no RH27 mANetwork Sensors with display and RH28 mA (non-isolated) or 5 mA (isolated)CO2 Network Sensors (NS-BCN7004-0)90 mA - may be a temporary loadDIS1710 Local Controller Display


Table 87: Power Consumption by Common SA Bus DevicesPower Consumption on the SA BusSA Bus DeviceNA (self-powered)Variable Speed DrivesNA (self-powered)IOM Series Controllers

SA bus applications are limited to a power load of 210 mA (SA Bus modular jack) or 240 mA (SA Bus terminal block).

The best practice when configuring an SA bus is to limit the total available operating power consumption to 120 mAor less. This power level allows you to temporarily connect a DIS1710 Local Controller Display to the bus forcommissioning, adjusting, and monitoring.


SA Buses with Multiple Network SensorsAn SA bus supports up to four network sensors. Figure 117 shows an example of two SA buses, each with fournetwork sensors. To place multiple network sensors on the bus, three of the network sensors must be DIP switchaddressable.Note: Do not mix RJ-style modular (phone) jack and screw terminal devices on the SA bus. Due to the permanent

internal SA bus EOL termination contained in FECs, FACs, IOMs, and VMAs, using both the phone jack andterminal block effectively puts the EOL termination in the middle of the SA trunk, creating a star networkconfiguration. This configuration violates the RS-485 network wiring guidelines and can cause unpredictablecommunication problems.

Some NS Series Network Sensors and NS Series Discharge Air Sensors models are DIP switch addressable.

Figure 117: SA Bus Example Showing Multiple Networks Sensors

Device Addressing on the MS/TP BusEach device connection on an MS/TP bus requires a device address to coordinate communication. Each bus hasa set of device addresses that is separate and independent from the device addresses on all other buses. Devicesconnected to both an MS/TP bus and SA bus have two device addresses, one for each bus connection (Figure 1).

In theMS/TP bus hierarchy, device connections on separate buses can have the same device address. For example,every bus supervisor connection on an MS/TP bus has a device address of 0 (zero), and the device address for thefirst network sensor on any SA bus is 199. This is possible because separate buses are identified with differentnetwork numbers. Figure 1 shows a simple example of an MS/TP bus and the device addresses for connections onthe FC bus and SA bus.


An NAE, NCE, or BACnet Router is the bus supervisor on an FC bus (or Remote Field Bus). The FAC, FEC, VMA16,or the field controller on an NCE is the bus supervisor on an SA bus. Bus supervisors have a fixed device addressof 0 (zero) that cannot be changed (Figure 1). Depending on the model, a network sensor has a fixed address of199 or an assigned (switch-selectable) address between 200 and 203. Table 88 provides a list of the valid MS/TPdevice address values and address value ranges for MS/TP devices.

EachMS/TPmaster controller passes the token to the controller with the next known address. After 50 token passes,each controller searches for other controllers that might have joined the network by attempting to send the token tothe controller with the next consecutive address, starting with one higher than its own, until one is found. While youdo not need to address devices on the trunk consecutively, you can improve performance by minimizing addressskipping. To help with address value selection, see Table 88.

Note: The devices on the bus do not need to be physically wired in sequential order.

Setting a Device AddressFor most devices on an MS/TP bus, the (non-supervisory) device address is set by positioning the DIP switches onthe device’s ADDRESS DIP switch block. The DIP switch blocks are binary switch blocks, with each switchrepresenting a binary numerical value when the switch is in the ON position.

The device address set on the ADDRESS DIP switch block applies to the device connection on the bus where thedevice is not the bus supervisor. For example, the DIP switches on FACs, FECs, or VMA16s (master devices) setthe device address for the device connection to the FC bus. If the FAC, FEC, or VMA16 also supervise an SA bus,the FAC's, FEC's, or VMA16's address on an SA bus is 0 by default (Figure 118).

An IOM has only one device connection, which can connect to either an FC bus or an SA bus (but not both); therefore,the device address set on an IOM applies to the bus to which the IOM is connected. (An IOM is never a bussupervisor.)

Figure 118: MS/TP Bus Showing FC Bus and SA Bus Addresses


Table 88: Valid MS/TP Bus Address Values and Address Ranges for MS/TP Bus DevicesDevicesClassAddress Value/

Address RangeFC Bus: NAE or NCE

SA Bus: FAC, FEC, VMA16, or NCE

Bus Supervisor0

N/AReserved for JCI use1–3ZFR1810 Wireless Field Bus Coordinator

Not supported for Smoke Control.

Reserved120-127

FC Bus: FACs, FECs, VMA16s, IOMs, TECs, and non-FX familydevices

SA Bus: IOMsNote: On applications using an NCE, the address value 4 is

reserved for the NCE’s integral field controller.

Master Range4–127

FACs/FECs/IOMs/VMAs: Wireless mode with address rangeof 4-127 and bit 128 active; not supported for Smoke Control.

Reserved4–119 (Switch 128 ON)

Subordinate devices, VSDs, and NS network sensors on theSA Bus. Not Supported on the FC bus.

Subordinate Range128–254

VAV Balancing Sensor (handheld)Reserved198Most NS Series Network Sensor models or VAV BalancingSensor (wall-mounted)

Reserved199

NS Series Network Sensors (specified models)Reserved200–203NS-DTN7043-0 and NS-DTN7083-0 Network SensorsReserved204–211NS-BCN7004-0 Network CO2 SensorReserved212–219

Do not apply address 255 to any device.Broadcast255

Important: On FAC, FEC, VMA16, and IOM Series controllers only, the 128 DIP switch on the controller’s deviceaddress DIP switch block is a mode switch used to enable the controller to operate in a wireless modeusing the ZFR1800 Series Wireless Field Bus System. On any FAC, FEC, VMA16, or IOM Seriescontroller that is hardwired to anMS/TPBus, set the 128 DIP switch to the OFF position.Operatingany FAC, FEC, VMA16, or IOM that is hardwired to an MS/TP Bus with the controller’s 128 DIP switchset to the ON position results in communication failure on the bus.

As you set the device address (Figure 119), the best practice is to set the highest switch value first, then the nexthighest switch value, and so on, until the total of the switch values equal the intended device address. For example,positioning switches 16, 4, and 1 to ON sets the device address to 21 for a device on the FC bus.

Figure 119: Setting the Device Address on the ADDRESS DIP Switch Block


Notes:

• You must set switch 128 to OFF on all Metasys controllers that are hardwired to an FC bus.• Devices may go offline momentarily when a device address is changed on an active bus. A device reset is not

required on field controllers or supervisory engines after changing the MS/TP address.

Some devices, such as the TEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party MS/TP devices, use their own configurationsettings to establish the device address for their connection to the bus. Refer to the device manufacturer’s productdocumentation for instructions on setting the device address. The device address values for TEC thermostats andall third-party devices must comply with the rules and ranges described previously.

End-of-Line Termination on the MS/TP BusDaisy-chained RS485-protocol networks typically require some type of end-of-line (EOL) termination to reduceinterference caused by signal reflection that occurs when data transmissions reach the end of a bus segment andbounce back on the segment. The high baud rates on MS/TP bus applications require robust EOL termination andstrict adherence to the EOL termination rules. Figure 120 shows an example of the EOL termination settings on anMS/TP bus application.

The EOL termination requirements for the FC bus are different from the SA bus requirements. See End-of-LineTermination on Local FC Bus and End-of-Line Termination on SA Bus for more information.

Also, third-party MS/TP devices and TEC26xx Series thermostats have different EOL termination requirements fromMetasys devices on the FC bus. See TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices for moreinformation.

Figure 120: EOL Terminations on an MS/TP Bus


End-of-Line Termination on Local FC BusThe FC bus requires EOL termination at the end of each bus segment. Figure 121 shows four examples of EOLtermination on the FC bus.

Figure 121: FC Bus Segment EOL Termination Scenarios

Note: • Set the EOL termination switch on a repeater’s device connection to ON only when the repeater connectionterminates a bus segment. See Scenarios 3 and 4 in Figure 121.

• Third-party MS/TP devices and TEC26xx Series thermostats have different EOL termination requirementson the FC bus. See TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP Devices for more information.


End-of-Line Termination on SA BusOn an SA bus, the minimum requirement is that EOL terminationmust be enabled on at least one device. Since anSA bus supervisor always has EOL termination enabled, this requirement is always met; however, for enhancedbus performance, we recommend that you enable EOL termination on the devices at each end of the SA bus. SeeFigure 122 for SA bus EOL termination scenarios.

Figure 122: SA Bus EOL Termination Scenarios

Note: The MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator module is not designed for EOL termination on the SAbus.

TEC26xx Series Thermostats and Third-Party MS/TP DevicesTEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party MS/TP devices generate more data traffic thanMetasysMS/TP devices.Increased data traffic reduces FC bus performance and reduces the number of devices that can be connected tothe bus. When any of these devices are connected on an FC bus, different device and cable length limits apply tothe bus and bus segments.

If you connect one or more TEC26xx Series thermostats and third-party BACnet MS/TP devices on an FC bus, thesupported maximum device counts, bus segments, and bus length are as follows:

• 64 devices total per FC bus (maximum)• 3 bus segments per FC bus (maximum)• 32 devices per bus segment (maximum, not to exceed 64 devices total on FC bus)• 1,220 m (4,000 ft) maximum per bus segment (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted, shielded cable)• 3,660 m (12,000 ft) maximum per FC bus (using 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire twisted, shielded cable)


EOL Terminator ModuleTheMS-BACEOL-0 RS485 EOL Terminator is a non-smoke control listed component that provides EOL terminationon FC bus segments when the device connected at the end of a bus segment does not have integral EOL terminationcapability.

The EOL terminator is a compact, lightweight, module wrapped in a protective cover, as shown in the followingfigure, that can be quickly installed in a variety of ways. The EOL connects directly to the terminating device on abus segment with the attached wire leads. The EOL requires 24 VAC, Class 2 power supplied by the field device orother 24 VAC source.

Figure 123: MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 EOL Terminator

An EOL terminator is required in all Metasys MS/TP applications wherever a terminating device on an FC bussegment does not have integral EOL termination (for example, TEC26xx Series thermostats). Some thermostats,such as the TEC3000 Series, have built-in EOL termination switches.

The EOL terminator is designed for FC buses and provides better bus performance than the integral EOL terminationon third-party devices. An EOL is recommended wherever a third-party device terminates an FC bus segment. Ifthe EOL terminator is connected to a third-party device that has integral EOL termination, the integral EOL terminationon the third-party device must be disabled.


Figure 124: MS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator Dimensions

Location and Mounting Considerations for MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator ModuleConsider the following when determining a location for the EOL terminator:

• Only mount the terminator indoors (or in a panel or enclosure where the ambient operating conditions aremaintained).

• Do not mount the terminator near high-voltage wires, high-voltage equipment, or radio transmitting devices thatmay produce interference.

• Do not mount the terminator on hot surfaces, surfaces that condense water, or surfaces prone to vibration suchas duct work.

• Do not mount the terminator in areas where environmental contaminants, such as corrosive vapors or airborneparticulates, are present.

The EOL terminator may be field mounted in a variety of ways. Consider the following when mounting the terminator:

• If possible, install the terminator in an electrical wallbox, handi-box, enclosure, or panel.• The wire leads can support the weight of the terminator (only), but it is recommended that the terminator be

secured to a suitable support.• You can attach the terminator to a suitable support (such as a DIN rail) using the foam tape provided or with a

user-supplied cable tie-wrap.• On room sensor and thermostat applications, install an adequate amount of fire-resistant insulation to plug the

hole where the wires pass through the sensor or thermostat base and wall to reduce temperature infiltration fromthe wall cavity to the sensor.


Figure 125: EOL Terminator Connected to a TEC2600 Series Thermostat to Provide End-of-Line Terminationon an FC Bus

Important: Before installing the MS-BACEOL-0 RS-485 EOL Terminator in plenum applications, verify acceptanceof exposed plastic materials in plenum areas with the local building authority. Building codes for plenumrequirements vary by location. Some local building authorities accept compliance to UL 1995, Heatingand Cooling Equipment. Check with the local building authority for local building codes.

Wiring the MS-BACEOL-0 EOL Terminator Module


Important: Do not connect 24 VAC supply power to the EOL Terminator before wiring is complete.

Important: Use copper conductors only. Ensure all wiring is in accordance with local, national, and regionalregulations.

Important: The EOL Terminator is a low-voltage (<30 VAC) device. Do not exceed the EOL Terminator electricalratings.


Observe the following guidelines when wiring the EOL terminator:

• The EOL terminator is designed for MS/TP trunks on Metasys RS-485 Buses. Connect the EOL terminator toonly MS/TP trunks on Metasys RS-485 FC Buses.

• Connect the EOL terminator to MS/TP devices that terminate Metasys bus segments and do not have integralEOL termination capability.

• When a third-party device terminates a Metasys FC Bus segment, it is recommended that any EOL terminationon the third-party be disabled and an EOL terminator be installed to provide EOL termination on the bus segment.

• When the third-party (terminating) device has only the + and - terminals (no REF or COM), isolate and insulatethe blue REF lead on the EOL (Figure 126).

Connect the EOL FC Bus leads to the appropriate FC Bus terminals on the bus terminating device (Figure 126).


Connect the EOL 24 VAC power supply leads to a dedicated or surged protected 24 VAC, Class 2 power supply(Figure 126).

Figure 126: Wiring the EOL Terminator to a Bus-Terminating Device

SpecificationsTable 89: MS-BACEOL-0 Specifications

SpecificationsCategoryMS-BACEOL-0 RS-485 End-of-Line TerminatorProduct Code

24 VAC, 1.2 VA MaximumPower Requirements

Power: Two 200 mm (8 in.) 22 AWG wire leads for 24 VAC supply powerconnections

Network: Three 200 mm (8 in.) 22 AWG wire leads for RS-485 Bus connections

Wiring Terminations and Network Interfaces

32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)Ambient Operating Temperature

10 to 93% RH, noncondensingAmbient Operating Humidity

70 x 38 x 10 mm (2-3/4 x 1-1/2 x 3/8 in.) with five 20 cm (8 in.) 20 AWG wire leadsDimensions

40.0 g (1.4 oz)Shipping Weight


Table 89: MS-BACEOL-0 SpecificationsSpecificationsCategoryUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy ManagementEquipment. FCC Compliant to CFR, Part 15, Subpart B, Class AUL Listed, FileS4977, UUKL, UL 864 Ninth Edition, Smoke Control System Equipment

Canada: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX7, CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 205, SignalEquipment. Industry Canada Compliant, ICES-003

Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls declares that this product is in compliancewith the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive2004/108/EC.

Australia and New Zealand: RCM Mark, Australia/New Zealand EmissionsCompliant


Wiring the MS/TP Bus




Important: Properly install, terminate, and ground the cable shield on the MS/TP (FC) Bus to minimize inductivenoise, which can result in unreliable communication on the bus.


Observe the following when installing and wiring the MS/TP (FC) Bus:

• Do not run cables near moving parts. Avoid sharp bends, abrasion, and the potential for severing or crushingthe cable.

• Run cables in conduit if the bus is routed outside the mechanical room or goes more than 20 feet.• Route cables neatly to promote good ventilation, visibility, testing, and ease of service.• Provide some slack in the wires and cables to allow for access and servicing.• Protect, coil, and secure any excess cable.• Ensure proper grounding for bus cable shielding.• Ensure proper EOL termination on buses and bus segments.• Use a dedicated transformer (PAN-PWRSP-U) for 24 VAC supply power to the network devices.

The MS/TP (FC) Bus is a 22 AWG stranded, 3-wire, twisted shielded cable. Figure 127 shows a wiring detail for theMS/TP (FC) Bus terminal blocks. See Table 84 for bus cable length limits.


Figure 127: FC Bus and SA Bus Terminal Block Wiring Details

Follow these guidelines for wiring the MS/TP (FC) Bus:

• Wire the bus devices in a daisy-chained network configuration. Maintain polarity (FC+ to FC+, FC- to FC-, COMto COM, and SHLD to SHLD) along entire bus daisy-chain (Figure 127).

• Twist the MS/TP (FC) Bus lead pairs together before inserting into the termination and ensure that the terminationis tight at each terminal block on the daisy chain.

• Each MS/TP (FC) Bus segment must have only one hard ground connection to the cable shield.• The hard ground connection to the cable shield should be made at the NAE when the NAE terminates the bus

segment. Cable shield ground connection should be made within the first inch after entering the NAE enclosure.• All other cable shield connections along the bus segment must be isolated from ground unless network

communication problems persist.

Screw Terminal Blocks for Connecting FC and SA Bus CablesBoth the FC bus and SA bus terminations have pluggable screw terminal blocks that allow you to connect the busdevices in a daisy-chain configuration. Connect the devices to the FC bus segments and SA bus as shown in Figure128 .

Note: • The SHLD terminal on the FC bus terminal block is electrically isolated from ground and is provided asa convenient terminal for connecting the cable shield in a daisy-chain on the bus segment.

• Do not mix RJ-style modular (phone) jack and screw terminal devices on the SA bus. Due to the permanentinternal SA bus EOL termination contained in FECs, FACs, IOMs, and VMAs, using both the phone jackand terminal block effectively puts the EOL termination in the middle of the SA trunk, creating a starnetwork configuration. This configuration violates the RS-485 network wiring guidelines and can causeunpredictable communication problems.

• Certain MS-IOM models have gray SA/FC terminal blocks rather than blue or brown.


Figure 128: FC Bus and SA Bus Terminal Block Wiring Details

Grounding the MS/TP Bus Cable ShieldInductive interference and Radio Frequency (RF) interference can adversely affect MS/TP applications, causingpoor bus performance and frequent device offline occurrences. Experience has shown that installing a properlygrounded shielded bus cable in MS/TP applications greatly reduces the impact of ambient inductive noise and RFinterference. Applications installed without shielded cable are much less tolerant to ambient interference.

We recommend installing MS/TP bus applications using shielded cable. In applications using shielded cable, it isvery important to ground the cable shield properly. Improper shield grounding can also result in poor bus performanceand frequent device offline occurrences.

To properly ground the cable shield on an MS/TP application, the cable shields on each bus segment must beconnected in a daisy-chain as shown in Figure 128. Each daisy-chained segment must be connected at one point(only) to a hard ground connection. We recommend connecting the cable shield to hard ground close to the bussupervisor’s bus terminations. In metal panel or enclosure applications, connect the cable shield to ground wherethe bus cable enters the panel or enclosure that contains the bus supervisor. On bus segments without a bussupervisor, the best practice is to connect the cable shield to hard ground at a bus device near the middle of thebus segment.

Important: Ensure that the cable shield is connected to hard ground at only one point on the bus segmentand is completely isolated from hard ground at all other points. Multiple hard ground connections on abus segment can create ground loop currents in the cable shield, resulting in poor bus performanceand frequent device offline occurrences.

In certain environments with high ambient inductive interference or strong radio frequency transmissions, an MS/TPapplication may require the addition of soft ground connections along the bus segments to enhance bus performanceand reduce device offline occurrences, or possible device damage.

Examples of potential inductive interference include large motors, contactors, relays, welding equipment, high-voltageconductors that are not in metal conduit or raceways, other high wattage devices within 10 m (30 ft) of the bus cable,and areas of frequent lightning.

Examples of potential radio frequency interference include locations near airports, hospitals, radio or televisiontransmission towers, police and fire stations, or factories. Mobile transmitters in police, fire, emergency, and fleetvehicles are also potential sources of radio frequency interference.


Note: Themajority of properly groundedMS/TP applications do not require soft ground connections, but you shouldassess the potential interference that your application may encounter (before you install the bus). It is moreefficient to prepare for soft ground connections when making the bus terminations at the initial installationthan to return and do it later.

Soft ground connections should be made within 2 inches of the bus terminations of any bus device that experiencesfrequent offline occurrences resulting from high ambient inductive or RF interference (Figure 129).

Figure 129: Applying a Soft Ground Connection to an FC Bus

RJ-Style Modular Jack and Cables for SA BusThe 6-pin modular jack SA bus connection (Figure 130) is a straight-through (not a crossover) connection and thatuses a 6-wire connector cable (with 6-pin RJ-style modular jacks) to connect SA devices to network sensors, DIS1710Local Controller Display, and the VMA Balancing Sensor. On the 6-wire cable, two wires are used for networkcommunication, two wires for network sensor power, and two wires supply 15 VDC (200 mA maximum) power tothe devices connected to the sensor.

The cable connected to the SA bus 6-pin modular jack is a straight-through cable and cannot exceed 30 m (100 ft).Do not use crossover cables on the SA bus.

The SA bus 6-pin modular jack supports only one device and no other SA device may be daisy-chained to the port.

Every MS/TP device (except the NAE55) has at least one 6-pin modular jack. Modular jacks on the network sensorsallow you to connect a VMA Balancing Sensor.

Note: Do not mix RJ-style modular (phone) jack and screw terminal devices on the SA bus. Due to the permanentinternal SA bus EOL termination contained in FECs, FACs, IOMs, and VMAs, using both the phone jack andterminal block effectively puts the EOL termination in the middle of the SA trunk, creating a star networkconfiguration. This configuration violates the RS-485 network wiring guidelines and can cause unpredictablecommunication problems.


Figure 130: 6-Pin Modular Jack Pinout Details

FC Bus RepeaterThe NU-RPT101-1U and NU-RPT24-0U repeaters are optional components on the MS/TP Bus that serve twopurposes:

• Isolate Smoke Control equipment from Non-Smoke Control equipment.• Extend the physical length of the FC Bus on a single Smoke Control FC Bus.

The repeater must be factory-installed in a UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Listed enclosure. Therepeater provides isolation on the MS/TP (FC) Bus end of a smoke control system. Input and output wiring issupervised and power-limited. The repeater has non-power-limited wiring for the input power source. Only onerepeater per trunk is permitted.

Figure 131: MS/TP (FC) Bus Repeater

For more details on installing the repeater, refer to the manufacturer’s literature.


Physical FeaturesFigure 132: MS/TP Bus Repeater Physical Features

Setting EOL for the FC Bus RepeaterFigure 131 shows the EOL jumper locations for the NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U repeater. Table 90 indicatesthe EOL jumper settings.

Table 90: EOL Settings for MS/TP (FC) RepeaterIf RepeaterJumperSideAt end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).J1 and J2Side ANot at end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOLOut).

At end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 1 and 2 (EOL In).J3 and J4Side BNot at end-of-line, install both jumpers over Pins 2 and 3 (EOLOut).


SpecificationsTable 91: Physical Specifications

SpecificationCategory-13 to 158°F (-25 to 70°C)Operating Temperature Range10 to 93% RH, NoncondensingRelative Humidity (RH)NU-RPT101-1U: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.05A

NU-RPT24-0U: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.18A

Power

0.5 A, 250 V, 3AG typePower Line Fuse2 to 18 AWG (without terminal lugs);

14 to 18 AWG (with terminal lugs)

Power Wire AWG

Less than 32 feet (10 meters) lengthPower Wire LengthNetwork repeater - both RS-485 connections use modularterminal blocks with screw clamps. Wire range 14 to 26 AWG,CSA approval.

Communications Connections

Network repeater termination blockPower Wire Connections7 x 4.3 x 2.1 in (17.8 x 10.3 x 5.3 cm)Dimensions (L x W x D)3.0 pounds (1.4 kg) packed per unit.WeightUL Listed, CSA Certified file LR25710Approvals

Table 92: Communication SpecificationsSpecificationCategorySwitch settings on unit for 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200,38,400, and 76,800 baud rates.

Switch must be in the proper baud rate position for properoperation.

Baud Rates

One unit load equivalent.RS-485 Bus LoadingComplete RS-485 compliance for up to 32 unit loads (31 unitloads if a repeater is used).

RS-485 Bus Drive

The EOL termination network is enabled for the A side or B sidewhen the associated pair of jumpers are positioned over pins 1and 2. Conversely, the EOL is disabled (out of the circuit) whenthe pair jumpers are positioned over pins 2 and 3.

The EOL termination network is individually selected on boththe A and B sides by a pair of shorting clips. The A-side iscontrolled by jumper pair J1, J2 and the B-side is controlled byjumper pair J3 and J4

End-of-Line Termination Network

Half-duplex onlyDuplexTen bits typical (1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit). Otherformats are supported.

Data Format



Figure 133: Acromag Repeater UL/cUL Label Placement (NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U Model)

FC and SA Bus Transient ProtectionThe FC Bus and SA bus communication lines must have an SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protection kit installedwhen the conduit run between enclosures does not remain in the same room. For details, see Communication Busand Field Controller I/O Transient Protection.

The MS/TP field device’s I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protectionkit installed when the conduit run between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does not remainin the same room or runs for more than 20 feet. For details, see Field Controller I/O Transient Protection.

Commissioning Devices on the FC BusCommission the devices on the local and remote MS/TP buses using the CCT software. Refer to CCT Help(LIT-12011147) for information on commissioning an MS/TP bus application.

Applications and device configurations are downloaded to the hardware from the CCT computer using the WirelessCommissioning Converter or through the NAE, NCE, or Open Data Server (ODS) from theMetasys UI. Refer to theBACnet® Controller Integration with NAE/NCE Technical Bulletin (LIT-1201531) for more information.

Hardware points can be auto discovered from the online UI of the NAE, the Application and Data Server (ADS), theExtended Application and Data Server (ADX), or the Open Data Server (ODS).

MS/TP Bus Controllers

Standard Field Controller Features, Connections, and GuidelinesThe Smoke Control field controller models have several common features, wiring connections, guidelines. Thefollowing sections cover these similarities.


MountingImportant: All MS/TP bus devices must be mounted in a smoke listed enclosure at the Johnson Controls factory,

with the exception of VMAs that require installation on VAV boxes. Do not field-mount or alter themounting of any device installed in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure. Field-mountingor altering the mounting of any device installed in a Johnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosurevoids the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control listing.

Follow these guidelines when mounting the smoke listed enclosure that houses N2 Bus devices:

• Ensure that the mounting surface can support the enclosure.• Mount the enclosure where ambient operating conditions are always maintained. Do not mount the enclosure

where it may be exposed to any water, condensation, or other liquids, or to corrosive or flammable vapors ofany kind.

• Do not mount the enclosure on surfaces that are prone to vibration or in areas where electromagnetic emissionsfrom other devices or wiring can interfere with controller communication.

• Allow for sufficient space around the enclosure for cable and wire connections, easy cover removal, and goodventilation (minimum of 50 mm [2 inches] in each direction).

FC Bus Terminal BlockThe FC Bus terminal block is a blue, removable, 4-terminal plug that fits into a board-mounted jack. Wire the removableFC bus terminal block plugs on the controller, and other field controllers in a daisy-chain configuration using 3-wiretwisted, shielded cable.

Figure 134: FC Bus Terminal Block Wiring

Note: The FC bus Shield (SHLD) terminal is isolated and can be used to connect (daisy chain) the shields for FCbus wiring.

SA Bus Terminal BlockThe SA Bus terminal block is a brown, removable, 4-terminal plug that fits into a board-mounted jack. Wire theremovable SA Bus terminal block plugs on the controller, and other SA bus devices in a daisy-chain configurationusing 4-wire twisted, shielded cable.


Figure 135: SA Bus Terminal Block Wiring

Note: The SA PWR terminal supplies 15 VDC. The SA PWR terminal can be used to connect (daisy chain) the 15VDC power leads on the SA bus.

Supply Power Terminal BlockThe 24 VAC supply power terminal block is a gray, removable, 3-terminal plug that fits into a board-mounted jackon the top right of the controller.

Wire the 24 VAC supply power wires from the transformer to the HOT and COM terminals on the terminal plug asshown in Figure 136. The middle terminal on the supply power terminal block is not used.

Figure 136: 24 VAC Supply Power Terminal Block Wiring

Note: The supply power wire colors may be different on transformers from other manufacturers. Refer to thetransformer manufacturer’s instructions and the project installation drawings for wiring details.


Important: Connect the PAN-PWRSP-U power supply to the controller and all other network devices so thattransformer phasing is uniform across the network devices. Powering network devices with uniform 24VAC supply power phasing reduces noise, interference, and ground loop problems. The controller doesnot require an earth ground connection.

Input and Output Wiring GuidelinesTable 93 provides information and guidelines about the functions, ratings, and requirements for the controller inputand output terminals; it also references guidelines for determining proper wire sizes and cable lengths.

In addition to the wiring guidelines in Table 93, observe these guidelines when wiring controller inputs and outputs:

• Run all low-voltage wiring and cables separate from high-voltage wiring.• All input and output cables, regardless of wire size or number of wires, should consist of stranded, insulated,

and twisted copper wires.• Shielded cable is not required for input or output cables.• Shielded cable is recommended for input and output cables that are exposed to high electromagnetic or radio

frequency noise.• Inputs/outputs with cables less than 100 ft (30 m) typically do not require an offset in the software setup. Cable

runs over 100 ft (30m) may require an offset in the input/output software setup.





Same as (Universal) INn.

Note: Use 3-wire cable fordevices that sourcepower from the +15 Vterminal.

15 VDC Power Source for active (3-wire) inputdevices connected to the Universal INn terminals.

Provides 35 mA total current.

+15 VUNIVERSAL

(Inputs)

See Guideline A in Table 94.Analog Input - Voltage Mode (0–10 VDC)

10 VDC maximum input voltage

Internal 75k ohm Pulldown

INn

See Guideline B in Table 94.Analog Input - Current Mode (4-20 mA)

Internal 100 ohm load Impedance

Note: A current loop fail-safe jumper can bepositioned to maintain a closed 4-20 mAcurrent loop even when power to thecontroller is interrupted or off.

See Guideline A in Table 94.Analog Input - Resistive Mode (0–600k ohm)


Qualified Sensors: 0–2k potentiometer,

RTD (1k Nickel [Johnson Controls sensor],

1k Platinum, and A99B Silicon TemperatureSensor)

Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) Sensor

10K Type L (10K Johnson Controls Type II isequivalent to Type L) or 2.252K Type II

See Guideline A in Table 94.Binary Input - Dry Contact Maintained Mode

1 second minimum pulse width


Same as (Universal) INn.Universal Input Common for all Universal INterminals

Note: All Universal ICOMn terminals areisolated from all other commons on the-0 models. The -1 model ICOMnterminals are isolated from FC BUSCOM terminals only.

ICOMn





See Guideline A in Table 94.Binary Input - Dry Contact Maintained Mode

0.01 second minimum pulse width


INnBINARY

(Inputs)

Binary Input - Pulse Counter/AccumulatorMode

0.01 second minimum pulse width

(50 Hz at 50% duty cycle)


Binary Input Common for all Binary Input (IN)terminals

Note: All Binary ICOMn terminals share acommon, which is isolated from all othercommons, except the ConfigurableOutput (CO) common (OCOMn) whenthe CO is defined as an Analog Output.

ICOMn




Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more.

Note: The AO operates in Voltage Mode whenconnected to devices with impedances greaterthan 1,000 ohms. Devices that drop below 1,000ohms may not operate as intended for VoltageMode applications.

OUTnANALOG

(Outputs)

See Guideline B in Table 94.Analog Output - Current Mode (4-20 mA)

Requires an external load between 0-300 ohms.

Note: The AO operates in Current Mode whenconnected to devices with impedancesless than 300 ohms. Devices that exceed300 ohms may not operate as intendedfor Current Mode applications.

Same as (Analog) OUTn.Analog Output Signal Common for all AnalogOUT terminals.

Note: All Analog OCOMn terminals share acommon, which is isolated from all othercommons.

OCOMn





See Guideline C in Table 94.Binary Output - 24 VAC Triac (External Power)

Connects OUTn to OCOMn when activated.

External Power Source:

30 VAC maximum output voltage

0.5 A maximum output current

1.3 A at 25% duty cycle

Maximum 6 cycles/hour with M9220-BGx-3

40 mA minimum load current

OUTnBINARY

(Outputs)

Power Selection Jumperpositioned to External(EXT).

Binary Output Common (for OUTn terminal)

Note: Each Binary Output common terminal(OCOMn) is isolated from all other commons,including other Binary Output commons.

OCOMn

See Guideline C in Table 94.Binary Output - 24 VAC Triac (Internal Power)

Sources internal 24 VAC power (24~ HOT)

OUTnBINARY

(Outputs)

Power Selection Jumperpositioned to Internal (INT).

Binary Output - 24 VAC Triac (Internal Power)

Connects OCOMn to 24~ COM when activated.

Internal Power Source:

30 VAC maximum voltage to load




OCOMn





See Guideline A in Table 94.Analog Output - Voltage Mode (0–10 VDC)



External 1k to 50k ohm load required

OUTnCONFIGURABLE

(Outputs)

See Guideline C in Table 94.Binary Output 24 VAC Triac

Connects OUT to OCOM when activated.

External Power Source:

30 VAC maximum voltage to load




Same as (Configurable)OUTn.Analog Output Signal Common: AllConfigurable Outputs defined as Analog Outputsshare a common, which is isolated from all othercommons except the Binary Input common.

OCOMn

Binary Output Signal Common: AllConfigurable Outputs defined as Binary Outputsare isolated from all other commons, includingother Configurable Output commons.

The Relay output terminals canaccommodate the followingmaximum wire sizes:

Two wires per terminal:

1.5 mm2 (18 AWG) maximumwire size

or

One wire per terminal:

2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) maximum

Note: You must determinethe required wire sizefor the high-voltage(>30V) terminalsaccording to relayratings, the appliedload, and the local,national, or regionalelectrical codes.

Normally Open Contact

Connects OCOM to OUT NO when activated.

UL Listed (-0 model only)

1/4 hp 120 VAC, 1/2 hp 240 VAC

360 VA Pilot Duty at 120/240 VAC (B300)

3 A Non-inductive 24-240 VAC

OUT NO nRELAY n

(Outputs)

Relay Common

Isolated from all other terminal commons,including other Relay Commons.

OCOMn

Normally Closed Contact

Connects OCOM to OUT NC when activated.

UL Listed(-0 model only)

1/4 hp 120 VAC, 1/2 hp 240 VAC

360 VA Pilot Duty at 120/240 VAC (B300)

3 A Non-inductive 24-240 VAC

OUT NC n








Requires an external load of 1,000 ohm or more.

Note: The AO operates in Voltage Mode whenconnected to devices with impedancesgreater than 1,000 ohm. Devices thatdrop below 1,000 ohm may not operateas intended for Voltage Modeapplications.

OUTnUniversal

(Outputs)

See Guideline B in Table 94.Analog Output - Current Mode (4-20 mA)

Requires an external load between 0-300 ohm.

Note: The AO operates in Current Mode whenconnected to devices with impedancesless than 300 ohm. Devices that exceed300 ohm may not operate as intendedfor Current Mode applications.

See Guideline B in Table 94.Binary Output Mode - 24 VAC/DC Field-effectTransistor (FET)

Connects OUT to OCOM when activated.

30 V AC/DC maximum output voltage


40 mA minimum load current (hold current)

Same as OUTUniversal Output (UO) Common

Isolated from all other terminal commons,including other UO commons.

OCOMn


Cable and Wire Length GuidelinesTable 94: Cable Length Guidelines for Recommended Wire Sizes

AssumptionsMaximum Cable Lengthand Type

Wire Size/Gauge and TypeGuideline



457 m (1,500 ft) twisted wire1.0mm (18 AWG) stranded copperA297 m (975 ft) twisted wire0.8mm (20 AWG) stranded copper





229 m (750 ft) twisted wire1.0mm (18 AWG) stranded copperB137 m (450 ft) twisted wire0.8mm (20 AWG) stranded copper



N/ASee Maximum Cable Lengthversus Load Current todetermine cable length.

Use twisted wire cable.

See Maximum Cable Lengthversus Load Current to select wiresize/gauge.

Use stranded copper wire.

C

Maximum Cable Length versus Load CurrentUse Figure 137 to estimate the maximum cable length relative to the wire size and the load current (in mA) whenwiring inputs and outputs.

Figure 137: Maximum Wire Length by Current and Wire Size


FAC Advanced Application Field Equipment ControllersThe Advanced Application Field Equipment Controllers (FACs) are 32-bit field controllers that run a variety ofpre-engineered Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) applications and provide the inputs/outputs requiredfor these applications. These controllers are members of the Metasys system Field Equipment Controller (FEC)family. For a list of FACs approved for smoke control, see Table 125.

Figure 138: FAC2611-0U Advanced Application Field Equipment Controller

Figure 139: FAC2612-1U Advanced Application Field Equipment Controller


Physical FeaturesFigure 140: FAC2611-0U Physical Features

Table 95: FAC2611-0U Physical FeaturesPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutConfigurable Output (COs) Terminal Blocks (Four COs)1SPDT Relay Terminal Blocks (Two)2Mounting Clips (Three)3SPST Relay Terminal Blocks (Three)424 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power Terminal Block (PAN-PWRSP-U only)5Cover Lift Tab (One of Two)6Field Controller (FC) Bus Terminal Block7Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus Terminal Block8Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus Port (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)9Four Binary Input (BI) Terminal Blocks. Dry Contact Maintained or Pulse Counter/Accumulator Mode.10Five Universal Inputs (UI) Terminal Blocks. Can be defined as Voltage Analog Input (0–10 VDC), Current AnalogInput (4–20 mA), Resistive Analog Inputs (0–600k ohm), or Dry Contact Binary Input.

11

Current Loop Mode DIP Switch Block for Universal Inputs that are defined as Current Analog Input (4–20 mA) inthe system software.

12

End-of-Line (EOL) Switch13LED Status Indicators14Field Controller (FC) Bus Port (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)15Device Address DIP Switch Block16


Figure 141: FAC2612-1U Physical Features

Table 96: FAC2612-1U Physical FeaturesPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutConfigurable Output (COs) Terminal Blocks (Four COs)1SPDT Relay Terminal Blocks (Two)2Mounting Clips (Three)3SPST Relay Terminal Blocks (Three)424 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power Terminal Block (PAN-PWRSP-U only)5Cover Lift Tab (One of Two)6Field Controller (FC) Bus Terminal Block7Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus Terminal Block8Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus Port (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)9Four Binary Input (BI) Terminal Blocks. Dry Contact Maintained or Pulse Counter/Accumulator Mode.10Five Universal Inputs (UI) Terminal Blocks. Can be defined as Voltage Analog Input (0–10 VDC), Current AnalogInput (4–20 mA), Resistive Analog Inputs (0–600k ohm), or Dry Contact Binary Input.

11

Current Loop Mode DIP Switch Block for Universal Inputs that are defined as Current Analog Input (4–20 mA) inthe system software.

12

End-of-Line (EOL) Switch13LED Status Indicators14


Table 96: FAC2612-1U Physical FeaturesPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutField Controller (FC) Bus Port (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)15Device Address DIP Switch Block16

WiringObserve the following guidelines when wiring a field controller:








To wire all FAC controller models:

1. Terminate wiring per engineering drawings.2. Wire Network Sensors and other devices to the SA Bus or RJ-45 modular jack for sensors.3. Wire the FC Bus in a daisy chain to other devices on the FC Bus and the supervisory controller.4. Wire the SA Bus in a daisy chain.5. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate address in the range of 4 to 127.6. Add SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protector kits to all FC and SA Bus communication terminal block connections.

See SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection Kit for details.7. Add SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U transient protectors to all MS/TP I/O terminal connections. See Field Controller I/O

Transient Protection for details.8. Connect power to the FEC controller.9. Download and commission the FEC controller.


Transient ProtectionThe FAC controller's I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protection kitinstalled when the conduit run between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does not remainin the same room or goes beyond 20 feet. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requirestransient protection. The MOV is placed between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O commonterminal, and I/O terminal of the controller. Use the following reference table for installing the Input and Output MOVsper field controller for both the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.

Table 97: FAC2611-0U and FAC2612-1U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalsTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach UI and its corresponding +15Vterminal

+15 VUniversal Input


IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, IN5, IN6Universal Inputs


ICOM1, ICOM2, ICOM3, ICOM4, ICOM5, ICOM6Universal Inputs


IN7, IN8Binary Input


ICOM7, ICOM8Binary Input


OUT1, OUT2, OUT3Binary Outputs


OCOM1, OCOM2, OCOM3Binary Outputs


OUT4, OUT5, OUT6, OUT7, OUT8, OUT9Configurable Outputs


OCOM4,OCOM5,OCOM6,OCOM7,OCOM8,OCOM9Configurable Outputs

TroubleshootingUse Table 103 to troubleshoot the FAC controllers.


Table 98: FAC Series Controller Status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)Descriptions of LED StatesNormal StateLED ColorLED LabelOff Steady = No Supply Power or the controller’spolyswitch/resettable fuse is open. Check Output wiring forshort circuits and cycle power to controller.

On Steady = Power Connected

On SteadyGreenPOWER

Off Steady = No Faults

On Steady = Device Fault; no application loaded; Main Codedownload required, if controller is in Boot mode, or a firmwaremismatch exists between the field controller and the ZFR1811Wireless Field Bus Router.

Blink - 2 Hz = Download or Startup in progress, not readyfor normal operation.

Blink Rapidly - 5 Hz = One or more defined SA Bus devicesare offline. Check SA Bus devices for problems, includinglow batteries on wireless sensor.

Off SteadyRedFAULT

Blink - 2 Hz = Data Transmission (normal communication)

Off Steady = No Data Transmission (auto baud in progress)

On Steady = Communication lost, waiting to joincommunication ring

Blink - 2 HzGreenFC BUS


Off Steady = No Data Transmission (N/A - auto baud notsupported)


Blink - 2 HzGreenSA BUS

On Steady = EOL switch in On position.

Off Steady = EOL switch in Off position.

Off

(Except on terminatingdevices)

AmberEOL

SpecificationsTable 99: FAC Field Application Controller

MS-FAC2611-0U

MS-FAC2612-1U



Supply Voltage

14 VA maximum for FAC2611 only

Note: VA rating does not include any power supplied to the peripheral devicesconnected to Binary Outputs (BOs) or Configurable Outputs (COs), whichcan consume up to 12 VA for each BO or CO; for a possible totalconsumption of an additional 84 VA (maximum).

Power Consumption

Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH noncondensing

Storage: -40 to 80°C (-40 to 176°F); 5 to 95% RH noncondensing

Ambient Conditions

DIP switch set; valid controller device addresses 4–127 (Device addresses 0–3 and128–255 are reserved and not valid controller addresses.)

Controller Addressing for BACnetMS/TP


Table 99: FAC Field Application ControllerDIP switch set; valid control device addresses 1-255Controller Addressing for N2RS-485: selectable BACnet MS/TP or N2

3-wire FC Bus between the supervisory controller and field controllers

4-wire SA Bus between field controller, network sensors and other sensor/actuatordevices, includes a lead to source 15 VDC supply power (from field controller) tobus devices.

Communications Bus

H8SX/166xR Renesas® 32-bit microcontrollerProcessor4 MB Flash Memory and 1 MB Random Access Memory (RAM)MemorySuper capacitor maintains power to the onboard real-time clock for a minimum of72 hours when supply power to the controller is disconnected.

Real-Time Clock Backup Power Supply

MS-FAC2611 Model:

6 - Universal Inputs: Defined as 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, 0-600k ohm, or Binary DryContact

2 - Binary Inputs:Defined as Dry Contact Maintained or Pulse Counter/AccumulatorMode

3 - Binary Outputs: Defined as 24 VAC Triac (selectable internal or external sourcepower)

4 - Configurable Outputs: Defined as 0-10 VDC or 24 VAC Triac BO

2 - Analog Outputs: Defined as 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA

MS-FAC2612 Model:

5 - Universal Inputs: Defined as 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, 0-600k ohm, or Binary DryContact


4 - Configurable Outputs: Defined as 0-10 VDC or 24 VAC Triac BO

2 - Relay Outputs: (Single-Pole, Double-Throw); UL 916: 1/4 hp 120 VAC, 1/2 hp240 VAC; 360 VA Pilot Duty at 120/240 VAC (B300); 3 A Non-inductive 24-240 VAC;EN 60730: 6 (4) A N.O. or N.C. only

3 - Relay Outputs: (Single-Pole, Single-Throw)UL 916:1/4 hp 120 VAC, 1/2 hp 240VAC; 360 VA Pilot Duty at 120/240 VAC (B300); 3 A Non-inductive 24-240 VAC;EN 60730: 6 (4) A N.O. or N.C. only

Input and Output Capabilities

Input: 16-bit resolution

Output: 16-bit resolution, +/- 200 mV accuracy in 0-10 VDC applications

Analog Input/AnalogOutput Resolutionand Accuracy

Input/Output: Fixed Screw Terminal Blocks

SA/FC Bus and Supply Power: 4-Wire and 3-Wire Pluggable Screw TerminalBlocks

SA/FC Bus Port: RJ-12 6-Pin Modular Jacks

Terminations

Horizontal on single 35 mmDIN rail mount (preferred), or screwmount on flat surfacewith three integral mounting clips on controller

Mounting

Enclosurematerial: ABS and polycarbonate UL94 5VB; Self-extinguishing, PlenumRated

Housing


Table 99: FAC Field Application Controller150 x 190 x 53 mm (5-7/8 x 7-1/2 x 2-1/8 in.) including terminals and mounting clipsNote: Mounting space requires an additional 50 mm (2 in.) space on top, bottom

and front face of controller for easy cover removal, ventilation and wireterminations.


0.5 kg (1.1 lb)WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy ManagementEquipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A


Compliance



BACnet International:BACnet Testing Laboratories® (BTL) 135-2010 Listed BACnetAdvanced Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standard. For application at conditionsbeyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls® office. Johnson Controls shall not be liable fordamages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.



Figure 142: UL/cUL Label Placement for MS-FAC2611-0U and MS-FAC2612-1U Field Controllers

FEU and FEC Field Equipment ControllersThe FEU and FEC Series controllers are members of the Metasys system Field Equipment Controller (FEC) family.They are designed to run a variety of pre-engineered Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) applicationsand provide the inputs/outputs required for these applications. For a list of FEUs and FECs approved for smokecontrol, see Table 125. Note that the MS-FEU1610-0U model can only be used in the ADI FSCS panel.


Figure 143: FEC1611-1U and FEC2621-0U Field Equipment Controllers

Physical FeaturesFigure 144: FEC2621-0U Physical Features

Table 100: FEC1611 Physical Features Callouts and DescriptionsPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutBinary Output (BO) Source Power Selection Jumper Pin Blocks, 3 – BO Jumper Pin Blocks1Device Address DIP Switch Block2Mounting Clip3Configurable Output (COs) Terminal Blocks4


Table 100: FEC1611 Physical Features Callouts and DescriptionsPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutAnalog Outputs (AOs) Terminal Block524 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power Terminal Block6Cover Lift Tab (One of Two)7Display Navigation Buttons

Note: Not available on all FEC models.

8

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Display Area

Note: Not available on all FEC models.

9

Field Controller (FC) Bus Terminal Block10Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus Terminal Block11Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)12Binary Input (BI) Terminal Block, 2 – Binary Inputs13Universal Input (UI) Terminal Blocks, 6 – Universal Inputs14LED Status Indicators15Field Controller (FC) Bus Port (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)16Binary Output (BO) Terminal Blocks17










To wire all FEC controller models:



Transient Protection for details.8. Connect power to the FEC controller.9. Download and commission the FEC controller.

Transient ProtectionThe FEU/FEC controller's I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protectionkit installed when the conduit run between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does not remainin the same room. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room or runs 20 feet or longer requirestransient protection. The MOV is placed between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O commonterminal, and I/O terminal of the controller. Use the following reference tables for installing the Input and OutputMOVs per field controller for both the SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.

Table 101: MS-FEC1611-1U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground



IN1, IN2Universal Inputs


ICOM1, ICOM2Universal Inputs


IN3Binary Input


ICOM3Binary Input






Table 101: MS-FEC1611-1U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground for each output

OUT4, OUT5, OUT6, OUT7Configurable Outputs


OCOM4, OCOM5, OCOM6, OCOM7Configurable Outputs

Table 102: MS-FEU2610-0U, MS-FEC2611-0U, and MS-FEC2621-1U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach UI and its corresponding +15Vterminal



IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4Universal Inputs


ICOM1, ICOM2, ICOM3, ICOM4Universal Inputs












OCOM4, OCOM5, OCOM6, OCOM7Configurable Outputs


OUT8, OUT9Analog Outputs


OCOM8, OCOM9Analog Outputs

TroubleshootingUse to Table 103 troubleshoot the FEC/FEU controllers.


Table 103: FEC/FEU Series Controller Status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)Descriptions of LED StatesNormal StateLED ColorLED LabelOff Steady = No Power

On Steady = Power is supplied by Primary Voltage.

On SteadyGreenPOWER

Blink - 2 Hz = Download or Startup in progress, not readyfor normal operation


On Steady = Device Fault or no application loaded

Off SteadyRedFAULT




Blink - 2 HzGreenFC BUS







Off


AmberEOL

SpecificationsTable 104: FEC/FEU Series Technical Specifications

MS-FEU2610-0UMS-FEC1611-1UMS-FEU1610-0UProduct Code NumbersMS-FEC2621-0UMS-FEC2611-0U


Supply Voltage

14 VA maximum

Note: VA ratings do not include any power supplied to the peripheral devicesconnected to Binary Outputs (BOs) or Configurable Outputs (COs), which canconsume up to 12 VA for each BO or CO, for a possible total consumption ofan additional 84 VA (maximum).

Power Consumption

Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); 10 to 90% RH noncondensing

Storage: -40 to 80°C (-40 to 176°F); 5 to 95% RH noncondensing

Note: FEC models with an -xET suffix have an operating temperature range of -40 to70°C (-40 to 158°F).

Ambient Conditions

For BACnet-configured controllers: DIP switch set; valid field controller deviceaddresses 4-127 (device addresses 0-3 and 128-255 are reserved)

For N2-configured controllers: DIP switch set; valid control device addresses 1-255

Controller Addressing


Table 104: FEC/FEU Series Technical SpecificationsRS-485, field selectable between BACnet MS/TP and N2 communications:

3-wire FC Bus between the supervisory controller and field controllers

4-wire SA Bus between field controller, network sensors, and other sensor/actuatordevices, includes a lead to source 15 VDC supply power (from field controller) to busdevices

Communications Bus1

H8SX/166xR Renesas® 32-bit microcontrollerProcessor1 MB Flash Memory and 512 KB RAMMemoryMS-FEC16 and MS-FEU16 Models:

2 - Universal Inputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 4–20 mA, 0–600k ohm, or Binary DryContact

1 - Binary Inputs: Defined as Dry Contact Maintained or Pulse Counter/AccumulatorMode


4 - Configurable Outputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC or 24 VAC Triac BO

MS-FEC26 and MS-FEU26 Models:


2 - Binary Inputs: Defined as Dry Contact Maintained or Pulse Counter/AccumulatorMode



2 - Analog Outputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC or 4–20 mA


Analog Input: 16-bit resolution

Analog Output: 16-bit resolution and ±200 mV in 0–10 VDC applications

Analog Input/Analog OutputResolution and Accuracy


FC Bus, SA Bus, and Supply Power: 3-wire and 4-wire Pluggable Screw Terminal Blocks

FC Bus and SA Bus Port: RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jacks

Terminations

Horizontal on single 35 mm DIN rail mount (preferred), or screw mount on flat surfacewith three integral mounting clips on controller

Mounting

Enclosure material: ABS and polycarbonate UL94 5VB; self-extinguishingHousingMS-FEC16 Models: 150 x 164 x 53 mm (5-7/8 x 6-7/16 x 2-1/8 in.) including terminalsand mounting clips

MS-FEC26 Models: 150 x 190 x 53 mm (5-7/8 x 7-1/2 x 2-1/8 in.) including terminalsand mounting clips

Note: Mounting space for all field controllers requires an additional 50 mm (2 in.)space on top, bottom, and front face of controller for easy cover removal,ventilation, and wire terminations.

Dimensions (Height xWidth x Depth)

MS-FEC16 Models: 0.4 kg (0.9 lb)

MS-FEC26 Models: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)

Weight


Table 104: FEC/FEU Series Technical SpecificationsUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy ManagementEquipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A

UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Listed, Smoke Control Unitsand Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems Equipment

Compliance


UL Listed, File S4977, UL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 10th Edition Listed, Smoke ControlUnits and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

BACnet International: BACnet Testing Laboratories® (BTL) 135-2010 Listed BACnetAdvanced Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)


Figure 145: UL/cUL Label Placement for MS-FEU2610-0U, MS-FEC2611-0U, and MS-FEC2621-1U FieldControllers


IOM Field Equipment ControllersThe Input Output Modules (IOMs) are members of the Metasys system Field Equipment Controller family. The IOMprovides increased capacity to larger Field Equipment Controller (FEC) applications when used on the SensorActuator (SA) bus. The IOM can also be used on the Field Controller (FC) bus to connect additional physical pointsto the system. For a list of IOMs approved for smoke control, see Table 125.

Figure 146: IOM4711-0U Field Equipment Controller


Physical FeaturesFigure 147: IOM17 and IOM27 Physical Features


Table 105: IOM17 and IOM27 Physical FeaturesPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutDevice Address DIP Switch Block1Mounting Clip (One of Two)224 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power Terminal Block3Cover Lift Tab (One of Two)4Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus / Field Controller (FC) Bus Terminal Block5Binary Inputs (BIs) Terminal Block (Not available on IOM27)6End-of-Line (EOL) Switch

Note: The EOL Switch is located under the controller cover. You must remove the cover to change the EOLswitch position.

7

Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus or Field Controller (FC) Bus Port (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)8Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Status Indicators9Universal Outputs (UO) Terminal Blocks (Not available on IOM17)10Universal Inputs (UI) Terminal Blocks (Not available on IOM17)11Relay Output Terminal Blocks (Not available on IOM17)12


Figure 148: IOM47 Physical Features


Table 106: IOM47 Physical FeaturesPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCalloutBinary Output (BO) Source Power Selection Jumper Pin Blocks, 3 – BO Jumper Pin Blocks1Device Address DIP Switch Block2Mounting Clip (One of Three)3Configurable Output (CO) Terminal Blocks, 4 – Configurable Outputs4Analog Output (AO) Terminal Block, 2 – Analog Outputs524 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power Terminal Block6Cover Lift Tab (One of Two)7SA Bus or FC Bus Terminal Block8Binary Input (BI) Terminal Block, 2 – Binary Inputs9UI Terminal Blocks, 6 – Universal Inputs10End-of-Line (EOL) Switch

Note: The EOL Switch is located under the controller cover. You must remove the cover to change the EOLswitch position.

11

LED Status Indicators12Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus / Field Controller (FC) Bus Port (RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jack)13BO Terminal Block, 3 – Binary Outputs14










To wire IOM models:



Transient Protection for details.8. Connect power to the IOM.9. Download and commission the IOM.

Transient ProtectionThe IOM's I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U or a SMK-MOVKIT-BRD transient protection kit installedwhen the conduit run between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does not remain in the sameroom. Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requires transient protection. The MOV isplaced between earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal, and I/O terminals of thecontroller. Use the following reference tables for installing the Input and Output MOVs per field controller for boththe SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U and the SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits.

Table 107: MS-IOM1710-0U and MS-IOM1711-0U I/O MOVMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground for each input

IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4Binary Input


ICOM1, ICOM2, ICOM3, ICOM4Binary Input

Table 108: MS-IOM2710-0U and MS-IOM2711-0U I/O MOVMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground

+5 VUniversal Input (IOM2710Only)

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground



IN1, IN2Universal Inputs


ICOM1, ICOM2Universal Inputs


OUT1NORelay Output


Table 108: MS-IOM2710-0U and MS-IOM2711-0U I/O MOVMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground

OCOM1Relay Output


OUT1NCRelay Output


OUT2NORelay Output


OCOM2Relay Output


OUT2NCRelay Output


OUT3, OUT4Universal Outputs


OCOM3, OCOM4Universal Outputs

Table 109: MS-IOM3710-0U and MS-IOM3711-0U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground

+5 VUniversal Input (IOM3710Only)

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach UI and its corresponding +15Vterminal







OUT1NORelay Output


OCOM1Relay Output


OUT1NCRelay Output


Table 109: MS-IOM3710-0U and MS-IOM3711-0U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground

OUT2NORelay Output


OCOM2Relay Output


OUT2NCRelay Output


OUT3NORelay Output


OCOM3Relay Output


OUT3NCRelay Output


OUT4NORelay Output


OCOM4Relay Output


OUT4NCRelay Output


OUT5, OUT5, OUT7, OUT8Universal Outputs


OCOM5, OCOM6, OCOM7, OCOM8Universal Outputs

Table 110: MS-IOU4710-0U and MS-IOM4711-0U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweeneach UI and its corresponding +15Vterminal

+15VUniversal Input


IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, IN5, IN6Universal Inputs


ICOM1, ICOM2, ICOM3, ICOM4, ICOM5, ICOM6Universal Inputs


Table 110: MS-IOU4710-0U and MS-IOM4711-0U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U orSMK-MOVKIT-BRD installed betweenTerminal and Earth Ground

IN7, IN8Binary Inputs


ICOM7, ICOM8Binary Inputs







TroubleshootingUse Table 111 to troubleshoot the IOM controllers.

Table 111: IOM Series Controller Status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)Descriptions of LED StatesNormal StateLED ColorLED LabelOn Steady = Power is Supplied by Primary Voltage.

Off = No Power, or the controller’s polyswitch/resettable fuseis open. Check Output wiring for short circuits and cyclepower to the controller.

On SteadyGreenPOWER


On Steady = Device Fault; no application loaded; Main Codedownload required, if controller is in boot mode, or a firmwaremismatch exists between the IOM and the ZFR1811WirelessField Bus Router.

Blink – 2 Hz = Download or startup in progress, not readyfor normal operation

Off SteadyRedFAULT

Blink – 2 Hz = Data Transmission (Normal Communication)

Off Steady = No Data Transmission (N/A – auto baud notsupported)


Blink - 2 HzGreenSA/FC BUS



Off


AmberEOL


SpecificationsTable 112: IOM171x and IOM271x Technical Specifications

MS-IOM1711-0UMS-IOM1710-0UProduct Code NumbersMS-IOM2711-0UMS-IOM2710-0U


Supply Voltage

14 VA maximum only


Power Consumption

Operating: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F); 10% to 90% RH noncondensing

Storage: -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F); 5% to 95% RH noncondensing

Ambient Conditions


Addressing

BACnet® MS/TP, RS-485:

3-wire FC Bus between the supervisory controller and other controllers

4-wire SA bus between controller, network sensors and other sensor/actuator devices,includes a lead to source 15 VDC supply power (from controller) to bus devices.

Communications Bus

H8SX/166xR Renesas® 32-bit microcontrollerProcessor512 KB Flash Memory and 128 KB Random Access Memory (RAM)MemoryIOM1711:

4 - Binary Inputs:Defined as Dry Contact Maintained or Pulse Counter/AccumulatorMode.


IOM2711:


2 - Universal Outputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 4–20 mA, or 24 VAC/DC Field-EffectTransistor (FET) BO

2 - Relay Outputs: (Single-Pole, Double-Throw)

1/4 hp 120 VAC, 1/2 hp 240 VAC, 360 VA Pilot Duty at 120/240 VAC (B300) 3 ANon-inductive 24-240 VAC



Analog Input/Analog Output Resolutionand Accuracy




Terminations


Mounting

Enclosure material: ABS and polycarbonate UL94 5VB; Self extinguishing, PlenumRated

Housing


Table 112: IOM171x and IOM271x Technical Specifications150 x 120 x 53 mm (5-7/8 x 4-3/4 x 2-1/8 in.) including terminals and mounting clipsNote: Mounting space requires an additional 50 mm (2 in.) space on top, bottom


Dimensions(Height x Width x Depth)

0.5 kg (1.1 lb) maximumWeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy ManagementEquipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A


Compliance



BACnet International: BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Protocol Revision 4Listed BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)

Table 113: IOM371x and IOM471x Technical SpecificationsMS-IOM3711-0UMS-IOM3710-0UProduct Code NumbersMS-IOM4711-0UMS-IOU4710-0U

PAN-PWRSP-U only: 24 VAC (nominal, 20 VACminimum/30 VACmaximum), 50/60Hz, power supply Class 2

Supply Voltage

14 VA maximum only


Power Consumption

Operating: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F); 10% to 90% RH noncondensing

Storage: -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F); 5% to 95% RH noncondensing

Ambient Conditions


Addressing

BACnet® MS/TP, RS-485:

3-wire FC Bus between the supervisory controller and other controllers

4-wire SA bus between controller, network sensors and other sensor/actuator devices,includes a lead to source 15 VDC supply power (from controller) to bus devices.

Communications Bus

H8SX/166xR Renesas® 32-bit microcontrollerProcessor512 KB Flash Memory and 128 KB Random Access Memory (RAM)Memory


Table 113: IOM371x and IOM471x Technical SpecificationsIOM3711:


4 - Universal Outputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 4–20 mA, or 24 VAC/DC Field-EffectTransistor (FET) BO

4 - Binary Outputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 4–20 mA, or 24 VAC/DC Field-EffectTransistor (FET) BO


IOM4711:



3 - Binary Outputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 4–20 mA, or 24 VAC/DC Field-EffectTransistor (FET) BO


2 - Analog Outputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC or 4–20 mA







Terminations


Mounting

Enclosure material: ABS and polycarbonate UL94 5VB; Self extinguishing, PlenumRated

Housing

150 x 120 x 53 mm (5-7/8 x 4-3/4 x 2-1/8 in.) including terminals and mounting clipsNote: Mounting space requires an additional 50 mm (2 in.) space on top, bottom


Dimensions(Height x Width x Depth)

0.5 kg (1.1 lb) maximumWeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy ManagementEquipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A


Compliance






Figure 149: UL/cUL Label Placement for MS-IOM171x, MS-IOM271x, MS-IOM371x, and MS-IOM471x FieldControllers


VMA1600 ControllersThe Variable Air Volume (VAV) Modular Assembly (VMA) 16 Series controllers are programmable digital controllersthat communicate over a BACnet® MS/TP field bus. Included in the VMA1600 Series, the VMA1610 and VMA1620controllers have integral air-pressure sensors and a damper actuator in a pre-wired unit. VMA1600 Series controllersconnect easily to the NS Series Network Sensors for zone and discharge air temperature sensing and control. Fora list of VMA1600s approved for smoke control, see Table 125.

Figure 150: VMA1630-0U Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly


Physical FeaturesFigure 151: VMA1600 Controller Physical Features and Wiring Terminations


Table 114: VMA16 Physical FeaturesPhysical Feature: Description and ReferencesCallout24 VAC, Class 2 Supply Power Terminal Block1Device Address DIP Switch Block2Binary Outputs (BOs), 24 VAC Triacs3Configurable Outputs4Pneumatic Tubing5Manual Override Switch6Controller Coupler7Coupler Bolt8Universal Inputs (UIs)9Field Controller (FC) Bus Terminal Block10End-of-Line (EOL) Switch11Sensor Actuator (SA) Bus Terminal Block12Sensor Port (SA Bus) and FC Bus RJ-12 6-pin Modular Jacks13Anti-rotation Slot14Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Status Indicators15










To wire all VMA1600 controller models

1. Terminate wiring per engineering drawings.2. Wire Network Sensors and other devices to the SA Bus or RJ-45 modular jack for sensors.3. Wire the FC Bus in a daisy chain to other devices on the FC Bus and the supervisory controller.4. Ensure the device address DIP switches are set to the appropriate address in the range of 4 to 127.5. Add SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP transient protector kits to all FC and SA Bus communication terminal block connections.


Transient Protection for details.7. Connect power to the VMA.8. Download and commission the VMA.

Transient ProtectionThe VMA1600 controller's I/O lines must have a SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U transient protection kit installed when theconduit run between the controller’s enclosure and the MS/TP I/O field device does not remain in the same room.Only the I/O terminals whose field wiring leaves the same room requires transient protection. The MOV is placedbetween earth ground and each affected power terminal, I/O common terminal, and I/O terminals of the controller.Use the following reference tables for installing the Input and Output MOVs per field controller for theSMOKE-MOVKIT-0U.

Table 115: MS-VMA1610-0U and MS-VMA1610-1U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Uinstalled between the UI and itscorresponding +15V terminal

+15VUniversal Input

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Uinstalled between Terminal and EarthGround

INUniversal Input


ICOMUniversal Input

Table 116: MS-VMA1620-0U and MS-VMA1620-1U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Uinstalled between each UI and itscorresponding +15V terminal

+15VUniversal Input


INUniversal Input


ICOMUniversal Input

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Uinstalled


One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Uinstalled between Terminal and EarthGround for each ouput



Table 116: MS-VMA1620-0U and MS-VMA1620-1U I/O MOV PlacementMOV ProtectionTerminalTerminal TypeOne piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Uinstalled between Terminal and EarthGround for each ouput

OUT4, OUT5Configurable Outputs

One piece of SMOKE-MOVKIT-0Uinstalled between Terminal and EarthGround for each ouput

OCOM4, OCOM5Configurable Outputs

TroubleshootingUse Table 117 to troubleshoot the VMA1600 controllers.

Table 117: VMA1600 Series Controller Status Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)Descriptions of LED StatesNormal StateLED ColorLED LabelOff Steady = No Power

On Steady = Power is supplied by Primary Voltage.

On SteadyGreenPOWER

Blink - 2 Hz = Download or Startup in progress, not readyfor normal operation


On Steady = Device Fault or no application loaded

Off SteadyRedFAULT




Blink - 2 HzGreenMS/TP (FC) Bus





SpecificationsTable 118: VMA1600 Controllers Technical Specifications

MS-VMA1615-1UMS-VMA1610-0UProduct Code NumbersMS-VMA1630-1UMS-VMA1620-0U


Supply Voltage

10 VA typical, 14 VA maximumNote: VA rating does not include any power supplied to the peripheral devices

connected to Binary Outputs (BOs) or Configurable Outputs (COs), whichcan consume up to 12 VA for each BO or CO for a possible total consumptionof an additional 60 VA (maximum).

Power Consumption

Operating: 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)

Storage: -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F)

Ambient Conditions


Table 118: VMA1600 Controllers Technical SpecificationsInputs/Outputs: 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) spade lugs

FC Bus, SA Bus, and Supply Power: 4-Wire and 3-Wire Pluggable Screw TerminalBlocks

Sensor Port: RJ-12 6-Pin Modular Jacks

Terminations

DIP switch set; valid controller device addresses 4–127

(Device addresses 0–3 and 128–255 are reserved and not valid controller addresses.)

Controller Addressing

BACnet MS/TP, RS-485:

3-wire FC Bus between the supervisory controller and controllers

4-wire SA Bus between VMA controller, network sensors and other sensor/actuatordevices; includes a terminal to source 15 VDC supply power from VMA to SA Busdevices.

Communications Bus

VMA1610:

1 - Universal Input: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 0–600k ohm, or Binary Dry Contact

VMA1615:

3 - Universal Inputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 0–600k ohm, or Binary Dry Contact

2 - Binary Outputs: Defined as 24 VAC Triac (internal power source)

VMA1620:

1 - Universal Input: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 0–600k ohm, or Binary Dry Contact



VMA1630:

3 - Universal Inputs: Defined as 0–10 VDC, 0–600k ohm, or Binary Dry Contact




Analog Input: 15-bit resolution

Analog Output: 16-bit resolution and ±200 mV in 0–10 VDC applications


Setra transducer, differential pressure to electrical, 0 to 38.1 mm (0 to 1.5 in.) WC,0.5 to 4.5 VDC, 5 VDC supply, aluminum plated

Performance Characteristics:

Combined Repeatability and Hysteresis Error: ±0.05% of Full Span Maximum

Non-linearity Errors (Best Fit Method): ±1.0% of Full Span Maximum

Response Time (to within 63% of Full Scale Pressure with Step Change on Input):15 ms

Temperature Error from 15.6 to 48.9°C (60 to 120°F)

Null: ±0.06% of Full Span per °F Maximum

Span: ±1.5% of Full Span Maximum

Stability, Null: ±0.5% of Full Scale Maximum, 1 Year Minimum

Stability, Span: ±2.0% of Full Scale Maximum, 1 Year Minimum

Air Pressure Differential Sensor


Table 118: VMA1600 Controllers Technical SpecificationsTorque: 4 N·m (35 lb·in)

Stroke Time: 60 sec at 60 Hz, 72 sec at 50 Hz

Minimum Shaft Length: 44 mm (1-3/4 in.)

Actuator Rating

Mounts to damper shaft using single set screw and to duct with single mountingscrew.

Mounting

182 x 182 x 64 mm (7-3/16 x 7-3/16 x 2-1/2 in.)Note: Center of output hub to center of anti-rotation slot is 160 mm (6-5/16 in.).

Dimensions

(Height x Width x Depth)0.86 kg (1.9 lb)WeightUnited States: UL Listed, File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy ManagementEquipment, FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A


Compliance




UL/cUL Label PlacementUL/cUL Listing labels must be positioned as shown in Figure 152, Figure 153, and Figure 154.


Figure 152: UL/cUL Label Placement for MS-VMA1610-0U Field Controller





Smoke Control System Software

SCT, LCT, and CCTUse the SystemConfiguration Tool (SCT) at Release 11.1 in all phases of engineering, installation, and commissioningof NAEs and MS/TP (FC) Bus devices that make up the Metasys smoke control system. SCT is an offline tool thatcreates archive databases that you download to a smoke control NAE. You use the Logic Connector Tool (LCT) inSCT to create the standard smoke control applications that are included on the Branch Purchase Package (BPP)product disc. This product disc is preloaded with several smoke control application examples, including multi-storybuilding, warehouse, and single-story shopping mall. Lastly, you use the Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) atRelease 10.3 to create applications that configure the hardware I/O in a field controller. All three tools (SCT, LCT,and CCT) are used in the offline mode.


You can install and execute the standard smoke control applications on any smoke control NAE. Use the standardsmoke control applications as written; any sequence modification to the LCT program must be pre-approved by theAHJ. SCT must not be accessible to anyone other than designated qualified technicians who are responsible forinstalling, commissioning, and maintaining the smoke control site configuration. Password protection in SCT preventsunauthorized editing of the smoke control sequences.

HVAC PRO and GX-9100 Configuration ToolUse the HVAC PRO at Release 8.0x in all phases of engineering, installation, and commissioning of legacy N2 Busdevices that make up the Metasys smoke control system. You use the GX-9100 Graphic Configuration Softwaretool at Release 7.0x to engineer, install, and commission the DX-9100 series controllers. Both tools enable you todownload programming files over the N2 Bus. The BPP product disc is preloaded with several smoke controlapplication examples, including multi-story building, warehouse, and single-story shopping mall.

You can install and execute the standard smoke control applications on any smoke control NAE. Use the standardsmoke control applications as written; any sequence modification to the control program must be pre-approved bythe AHJ. Commissioning tools must not be accessible to anyone other than designated qualified technicians whoare responsible for installing, commissioning, and maintaining the smoke control site configuration.

System Programming Guidelines for Smoke ControlWhen programming the system for smoke control applications, the system must conform to the following guidelines.

• Name all systems used for smoke control in a manner that makes their identification obvious. For example, theair handling unit serving the west wing on the third floor might be called AHU3_W and the stairwell pressurizationsystem might be called STR_PRES.

• Name all objects within a system used for smoke control in a manner that makes their identification obvious. Forexample, the outdoor air damper might be called OSA_DMPR and the mixed air damper might be calledMXA_DMPR.

• Use engineering units that are appropriate to easily determine the current status of a device.• Use the 24-character expanded ID attribute in an object definition window to provide information that is pertinent

to an object’s type and location and is easily understood in an emergency situation.

Enclosures and AccessoriesEvery enclosure must be of correct metal thickness for its size, then mounted and wired in accordance with theUL/cUL Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems specification. The UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th EditionSmoke Listed enclosures are built by the Johnson Controls custom panel supplier.

The Johnson Controls factory mounts NAE controllers, switches, and all other equipment in the smoke controlnetwork in a UL/cUL Listed enclosure. Refer to the installation information packaged with each product. See thetables inGeneral Smoke Control Ordering Requirements for enclosure and accessory part numbers and specifications.See the Typical Panel Layouts for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing section for additional enclosure information

Important: All smoke listed enclosures are ordered through Johnson Controls. Device mounting is completed atthe factory. Do not field-mount or alter the mounting of any device installed in a Johnson Controlsapproved smoke listed enclosure. Field-mounting or altering the mounting of any device installed in aJohnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure voids the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition smokecontrol listing.

The power supplies described in the following sections are the only power supplies that meet the UL 864 10th EditionListing.


PAN-PWRSP-U Power SupplyThe PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply is a UL/cUL Listed and CSA Certified Class 2 120/24 VAC power supply with aduplex outlet and power switch.

Figure 155: PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply


WiringFigure 156: Wiring PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply

Power Supply ConnectionsThe 120 VAC supply power connects to a three-terminal block mounted on top of the PAN-PWRSP-U power supply.

To wire the PAN-PWRSP-U Main Power terminal, connect the 120 VAC supply wires to the respective Hot (H),Neutral (N), and Ground (G) terminals of the Main Power Input block (Figure 156).

An On/Off rocker switch on the right side of the power supply controls 120 VAC at the secondary power terminalblock and 24 VAC out from the power supply. The two utility outlets are unswitched and always remain Hot.

For the switched 24 VAC to Field - Wiring Connections:

1. Connect the PAN-PWRSP-U orange wire to the field device 24 VAC Hot terminal connection.2. Connect the PAN-PWRSP-U brown wire to the field device 24 VAC COM (Neutral) terminal connection.

Two factory-wired, unswitched 120 VAC utility plugs are part of the PAN-PWRSP-U power supply. One plug islocated on the front of the power supply, and the other is located on the right side. Connecting 120 VAC to the MainPower input terminal automatically powers the utility plugs.


SpecificationsTable 119: PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply Specifications

DescriptionCategory96 VA 120/24 VAC power assemblyPowerTwo receptacles 120 VAC, 5A manual resettable thermalprotection circuit breaker

Receptacle

120 VRMSPrimary Voltage24 VAC, 4 A MaximumSecondary VoltageClass 130Transformer InsulationClass 2Transformer Class32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)Operating TemperatureUL 508 CCN NMTR

CSA C22.2 No. 66-1988

Agency Listings



Figure 157: UL/cUL Label Placement for PAN-PWRSP-U Power Supply on Enclosure (1 in. [2.5 cm] fromEdge)

PAN-96VAXFR-U Power SupplyThe PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply is a UL/cUL Listed and CSA Certified Class 2 120/24 VAC power supply. Thispower supply is used in conjunction with a PAN-PWRSP-U power supply when loads exceed the PAN-PWRSP-U96 VA limit.


Figure 158: PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply

WiringFigure 159: PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply

Power Supply ConnectionsThe PAN-96VAXFR-U power supply is connected to a PAN-PWRSP-U power supply at the Secondary Outputterminal block. It is mounted in the same enclosure as the PAN-PWRSP-U. A rocker switch on the right side of thePAN-PWRSP-U controls the 120 VAC output.


To connect to the Switched Output (Figure 160):

1. Connect the Hot side of the PAN-96VAXFR-U to the Hot terminal of the PAN-PWRSP-U Secondary Powerterminal block.

2. Connect the Neutral wire of the PAN-96VAXFR-U to the Neutral terminal of the PAN-PWRSP-U SecondaryPower terminal block

Important: Be sure the ground lug for the PAN-PWRSP-U and PAN-96VAXFR-U are both securely mounted tothe backplane.

Figure 160: PAN-PWRSP-U to PAN-96VAXFR-U Wiring

SpecificationsTable 120: PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply Specifications

DescriptionCategory96 VA 120/24 VAC power assemblyPower4 A secondary, manual resettable thermal protection circuitbreaker

Receptacle

120 VRMSPrimary Voltage24 VAC, 4 A MaximumSecondary VoltageClass 130Transformer InsulationClass 2Transformer Class32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)Operating TemperatureUL 1585

CSA C22.2 No. 66-1988

Agency Listings



Figure 161: UL/cUL Label Placement for PAN-PWRSP-U and PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supplies (1 in. [2.5 cm]from Enclosure Edge)

PAN-PWRSP-IU Power SupplyThe PAN-PWRSP-IU Power Supply is a UL/cUL Listed and CSA Certified Class 2 230/24 VAC power supply witha duplex outlet and power switch.


Figure 162: PAN-PWRSP-IU Power Supply


WiringFigure 163: Wiring PAN-PWRSP-IU Power Supply

Power Supply ConnectionsThe 230 VAC supply power connects to a three-terminal block mounted on top of the PAN-PWRSP-IU power supply.

To wire the PAN-PWRSP-IU Main Power terminal, connect the 230 VAC supply wires to the respective Hot (H),Neutral (N), and Ground (G) terminals of the Main Power Input block (Figure 162).

An On/Off rocker switch on the right side of the power supply controls 230 VAC at the secondary power terminalblock and 24 VAC out from the power supply. The two utility outlets are unswitched and always remain Hot.

For the switched 24 VAC to Field - Wiring Connections:

1. Connect the PAN-PWRSP-IU orange wire to the field device 24 VAC Hot terminal connection.2. Connect the PAN-PWRSP-IU brown wire to the field device 24 VAC COM (Neutral) terminal connection.


Two factory-wired, unswitched 230 VAC utility plugs are part of the PAN-PWRSP-IU power supply. One plug islocated on the front of the power supply, and the other is located on the right side. Connecting 230 VAC to the MainPower input terminal automatically powers the utility plugs.

SpecificationsTable 121: PAN-PWRSP-IU Power Supply Specifications

DescriptionCategory96 VA 230/24 VAC power assemblyPower50/60 HzFrequencyTwo receptacles 230 VAC, 5A manual resettable thermalprotection circuit breaker

Receptacle

230 VAC, +/- 10%, 50-60 HzInput Voltage20-30 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 4 A MaximumOutput VoltageClass 2Transformer Class5 A circuit breaker provides 230 V protection for the primaryside of the power supply and 230 V auxiliary terminal block

4 A circuit breaker provides protection for the 24 V secondarywinding

Circuit Protection

32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)Operating Temperature6.25 in. W x 3.94 in. H x 4.5 in. D (159 mm W x 100 mm H x114 mm D)

Dimensions

5.15 lb (2.3 kg)WeightUL 508 CCN NMTR

CSA C22.2 No. 66-1988

Agency Listings



Figure 164: UL/cUL Label Placement for PAN-PWRSP-IU Power Supply on Enclosure (1 in. [2.5 cm] fromEdge)


PA0P00010FC0-U Power Distribution Panel and EnclosureThe PA0P00010FC0-U is a pre-wired, pre-assembled Standard Control Panel and enclosure that contains four 96VA 120/24 VAC Class 2 transformers, each with 4 A manual reset secondary protection for powering Variable AirVolume (VAV) box controllers. This predesigned solution saves both time and money by not requiring individualtransformers in every VAV box.

The PA0P00010FC0-U Control Panel is shipped complete, mounted in a 16 in. W x 20 in. H steel enclosure. Inaddition to the four 96 VA transformers, the assembly also contains low-voltage terminal blocks and a 10 A circuitbreaker that provides primary protection for all four transformers.

The PA0P00010FC0-U contains terminals that are pre-wired and pre-labeled to match each transformer, makinginstalling, commissioning, and servicing quicker and easier.


Figure 165: PA0P00010FC0-U Assembly 24 VAC Power Distribution Control Panel

Maximum devices per each 96 VA low-voltage power distribution trunk are as follows:

• A single field controller draws a maximum of 14 VA, which means you can have a maximum of six field controllersper 96 VA transformer.

• Relays and actuators can add another 6 VA, which means you can have a maximum of five field controllers per96 VA transformer if these additional components are used.

The preceding recommendations are based on a system where every controller is not fully loaded at all times.


PA0P00010FC0-U SpecificationsTable 122: PA0P00010FC0-U Specifications

DescriptionCategoryTerminal Blocks: 1/4 in. (6 mm) Wire SlotsTerminal BlocksAll Components are Pre-wired to Terminal BlocksWiringGround Wire: 14 AWG; Transformer Wires: 18 AWGWire SizeType 1Enclosure Rating32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)

10 to 93% RH

Ambient Operating Condition

Four PAN-96VAXFR-U Transformers, Power, Panel Mount, 120V Primary, 24 V Secondary, 96 VA, Split Bobbin, 4 A SecondaryCircuit Breaker, 10 A Primary Circuit Breaker that providesprimary protection for all four transformers.

Transformers

Type 1 with keyed lock, 16 in. W x 20 in. H x 6.62 in. D (406mm W x 508 mm H x 168 mm D)

Enclosure

Control Panel: UL 508ARated (cULus); Enclosure: UL 50 Rated,CSA Approved

Agency Compliance

UL/cUL Label PlacementThe UL/cUL Listing label (Figure 166) must be positioned on the inside door of the PA0P00010FC0-U enclosure.


Figure 166: UL/cUL Label Placement for PA0P00010FC0-U Power Supply on Enclosure Door (1 in. [2.5 cm]from Edge)


Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control PanelControl accessories that are smoke control listed, such as the Acromag NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U repeaterand Ethernet switches, are mounted at the factory in a smoke control enclosure, provided that:

• Enough space exists to mount the devices.• The total power required by the smoke control devices and the control accessories does not exceed the enclosure’s

power supply transformer rating. A second transformer may be required to satisfy total power requirements.• The addition of the control accessories does not cause the ambient temperature inside the enclosure to exceed

120°F (49°C).

Non-Smoke Control Listed Accessories in a Smoke Control PanelControl accessories that are non-smoke control listed, such as relays, gauges, pneumatics, and so forth, cannotbe mounted in a smoke control enclosure. You need to mount non-smoke control listed equipment in a separateenclosure. Also, no controller with an integral display can be flush-mounted to the front of a smoke-control listedpanel door.

Smoke Control EnclosuresUL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed enclosures are available as custom or standard enclosures.For more information, refer to the Metasys System UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control SystemCatalog Page (LIT-1901048).

Standard EnclosuresStandard enclosures are preconfigured panels built by Johnson Controls using UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th EditionSmoke Control listed components. The panels are configured with MS/TP, I/O, or Ethernet transient surge suppressionwhere applicable. Each panel comes with the appropriate software version and a factory-applied UL/cUL label. SeeTable 123 and Table 124 for a list of standard enclosure product code numbers. Standard enclosures are availablefor the following controllers: MS-NAE5510-2U, MS-NAE5510-3U, MS-FEC2611-0U, andMS-IOM4711-0U, in additionto others.

Important: All smoke listed enclosures are ordered through Johnson Controls. Device mounting is completed atthe factory. Do not field-mount or alter the mounting of any device installed in a Johnson Controlsapproved smoke listed enclosure. Field-mounting or altering the mounting of any device installed in aJohnson Controls approved smoke listed enclosure voids the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th EditionSmoke Control listing.

Custom EnclosuresUL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed custom smoke control enclosures are available throughthe Johnson Controls Control Panels website in the Custom Panels section. Use order form 1634-a to place a custompanel order. Be sure to select the Smoke Control check box in the Special Conditions section of this form. You willneed a Visio drawing or sketch showing only the approved components in to Table 130. If the local authority requiresthat a Union label be affixed to the panel, then select the Union Label Required check box. Custom enclosures areavailable for the following controllers: MS-NAE5510-2U, MS-NAE5510-3U, MS-FEUx610-0U (excludingMS-FEU1610-0U), MS-FECx611-0U, MS-IOU4710-0U, and IOMx71x-0U.


https://my.jci.com/sites/BE/NAProdControl/Pages/sales_aids.aspx

VAV Box EnclosuresCustom VAV box controller enclosures for housing the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control listedMS-VMA16x0-xU controllers are ordered from either Environmental Technology, Inc. or from Nailor Industries, Inc.To order an enclosure, contact your Johnson Controls Sales Representative. The local branch office is allowed tomount a MS-VMA16x0-xU controller in an enclosure specified in along with MOV kits for MS/TP, N2, and I/O transientsurge suppression. See Figure 167 for ETI or Nailor enclosure details and follow these rules:

• Be sure to select the Smoke Control Electronics Enclosure and Cover check boxes when ordering a new VAVbox unit from either ETI or Nailor.

• For systems that have a VAV box unit that was not manufactured by ETI or Nailor, order only the Smoke ControlElectronics Enclosure from ETI or Nailor. Install the enclosure on the non-ETI or non-Nailor manufactured VAVbox unit to house the controller.

• ETI and Nailor do not factory-install MS/TP, N2, or I/O transient surge suppression; therefore, all MOV kits mustbe installed in the field. For installation guidelines, see Communication Bus and Field Controller I/O TransientProtection.

Important: Operating MS/TP (FC) Bus, N2 Bus, or I/O in the field without MOV kits installed voids the UL 864 10thEdition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC listing. If your Standard UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition panelsor Custom UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th edition panel arrived from the factory with the originalSMOKE-MOVKIT-0U kit, you may not replace these components with the newer SMK-MOVKIT-BRDkit.


Figure 167: ETI or Nailor VAV Smoke Control Electronics Enclosure

Enclosures Requiring a Union LabelCertain jurisdictions require that smoke control panels display a union label. Johnson Controls must contract withan external union electrical shop to meet Union requirements. The process to meet these requirements includes thefollowing:

• The Johnson Controls Branch orders a Smoke Control Listed custom panel requiring a Union label.• Johnson Controls provides all Smoke Control Listed parts.• Every part of the smoke control panel, including the enclosure with manufacturer’s UL/cUL label, is inspected

and labeled at the factory in accordance with Johnson Controls Smoke Control Listing.• All parts are factory mounted in an enclosure by Johnson Controls in accordance with UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC

10th Edition Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.


• Johnson Controls sends the pre-assembled panel to the union electrical shop.• The union electrical shop wires the panel in accordance with UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Control Units

and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, applies the union label, and sends the completed panel to the specifiedsmoke control site.

Enclosures Requiring External Plastic Identification TagsA customer may require all enclosures on the job to have external plastic identification tags indicating the areas thatare being controlled. Identification tags must be approved by the local AHJ. The local Johnson Controls branch willthen create or order the tags and apply them to the exterior of the Johnson Controls UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10thEdition Smoke Control Listed custom or standard enclosures.

Ordering and Revision InformationTable 123 through Table 131 show ordering information and revision numbers (when applicable) for all orderableUL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Parts.

General Smoke Control Ordering RequirementsAll Smoke Control sites must abide by the following requirements:

• You cannot purchase a similar third-party device and install it in a UL/cUL Listed smoke control system. Doingso voids the UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing. Third-party devices must be provided and labeled by the JohnsonControls Reynosa factory as described in the UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing.

• You must order smoke control field equipment controllers by ordering the panel, not the controller by itself. Theexception is for VMAs, which you can order separately. You must purchase all panels through the JohnsonControls Reynosa factory. In order to be UL/cUL compliant, all equipment must be pre-installed and pre-wiredin a standard or custom panel built in the Johnson Controls Reynosa factory.

• A minimum of one UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control approved Ethernet switch is required foreach smoke control site. This is the requirement even if only one Smoke Control NAE is installed. See Table130 for a list of UL/cUL Listed Ethernet switches approved for use with Metasys Release 8.1.

• A PNET1GB Ethernet transient protector is required at each end of all Ethernet communication cables. ThePNET1GB transient protector must have the strain-relief tie-wrap installed. You can use CAT5/5e or CAT6Ethernet cable between two PNET1GB devices.

• All devices mounted in enclosures that have a 120 VAC power converter must have the power converter connectedto a TrippLite Isobar 8 Ultra surge suppressor mounted in the same enclosure. The surge suppressor is notrequired for the 24 VAC power converters.

• Acromag® NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U repeaters must be mounted in an enclosure and must have the120 VAC power connected to a TrippLite Isobar 8 Ultra surge suppressor mounted in the same enclosure.

• All technical guidelines for Release 8.1 products must be followed when upgrading from an earlier release.• When a smoke control system is upgraded to Metasys Release 8.1, a S/W Ver SCT 12.0 upgrade label must

be applied to every upgraded smoke control network engine, and a S/W Ver CCT 10.3, RM 10.2 upgrade labelmust be applied to every upgraded smoke control field controller. Also, when a legacy N2 Bus field controller isupgraded, an N2 Migration Metasys Release 8.1 upgrade label must be applied to the controller. Do not placea revision label over any other label on the controller.

The Johnson Controls products listed in through Table 127 have been tested and listed by UL for use in a MetasysSystem UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control System. Installation of a product that is not UL/cUL Listedand labeled for this application prevents the entire system from being UL/cUL Listed for smoke control. Also, nocomponents that are specifically labeled as Buy American have been listed for smoke control.


Table 123: Johnson Controls Standard PanelsDescriptionCode Number• MS-NAE5510-1U with two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) or two N2 Bus trunks (or one BACnet

MS/TP and one N2 Bus trunk)• Hoffman enclosure (9.25 x 24 x 24 in.) with keyed lock• EISK5-100T Contemporary Controls CTRLink 5-Port 10/100 Ethernet Switch• APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (4)• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (2)

Notes:

• The MS-NAE5510-1U engine has been discontinued, but you may use an existingMS-NAE5510-1U engine for UL/cUL 10th Edition if you apply the WES2009 operating systemupgrade.

• The PAGN00U11EC0 panel has been discontinued, but you may use an existingPAGN00U11EC0 panel for UL/cUL 10th Edition.

PAGN00U11EC0

(-- DISCONTINUED --)

• MS-NAE5510-2U with two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) or two N2 Bus trunks (or one BACnetMS/TP and one N2 Bus trunk)

• Hoffman® enclosure (9.25 x 24 x 24 in.) with keyed lock• EISK5-100T Contemporary Controls® CTRLink™ 5-Port 10/100 Ethernet Switch• APC® PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (4)• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (2)

PAG100U11EC0-1

• MS-NAE5510-3U with two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) or two N2 Bus trunks (or one BACnetMS/TP and one N2 Bus trunk)

• Hoffman® enclosure (9.25 x 24 x 24 in.) with keyed lock• EISK5-100T Contemporary Controls CTRLink 5-Port 10/100 Ethernet Switch• APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (4)• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (2)

PAG200U11EC0-1

• MS-FEC2611-0U and MS-IOM4711-0U with 12 UI, 4 BI, 6 BO, 4 AO, 8 CO• Hoffman enclosure (9.25 x 24 x 36 in.) with keyed lock• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• PAN-96VAXFR-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (3)• SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U Transient Protection for MS/TP I/O Communication (74), or three MOV

boards with MS/TP protection and one MOV board without MS/TP protection

PAKGJJU12BC0-1

• MS-FEC2611-0U and (2) MS-IOM4711-0U with 12 UI, 4 BI, 6 BO, 4 AO, 8 CO• Hoffman enclosure (9.25 x 30 x 42 in.) with keyed lock• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• PAN-96VAXFR-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (3)• Three MOV boards with MS/TP protection and one MOV board without MS/TP protection

PAKGJPU12BC0-1


Table 123: Johnson Controls Standard PanelsDescriptionCode Number• MS-FEC2611-0U with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, 4 CO• Hoffman enclosure (9.25 x 20 x 24 in.) with keyed lock• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (2)• SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U Transient Protection for MS/TP I/O Communication (37), or three MOV


PAKG00U11AC0-1

• MS-IOM4711-0U with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, 4 CO• Hoffman enclosure (9.25 x 20 x 24 in.) with keyed lock• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (2)• SMOKE-MOVKIT-0U Transient Protection for MS/TP I/O Communication (37), or three MOV


PAJJ00U11AC0-1

• EIS8-100T Contemporary Controls CTRLink 8-Port 10/100 Industrial Ethernet Switch• Hoffman enclosure (6.62 x 16 x 20 in.) with keyed lock• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (8)

PA5100U01FC0-1

• 2960-24TC-S Cisco Catalyst 24-Port 10/100/1000 Ethernet Switch• Hoffman enclosure (9.25 x 30 x 42 in.) with keyed lock• APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (24)• Tripp Lite® ISOBAR8 120 VAC Surge Protection

Note: The Cisco 2960-24TC-S switch has been discontinued, but this model can still be used forUL/cUL 864 10th Edition.

PA5200U15CC0


• Cisco 4000-16T4G-E Industrial Ethernet (IE) 16-port 10/100/1000 Switch• Hoffman enclosure (9.25 x 30 x 42 in.) with keyed lock• PWR-IE170W-PC-AC power supply, DIN-rail mounted• APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (16)• Tripp Lite ISOBAR8 120 VAC Surge Protection

PA5400U15CC0-1

• EISK5-100T Contemporary Controls CTRLink 5-Port 10/100 Ethernet Switch• Hoffman enclosure (6.62 x 16 x 20 in.) with keyed lock• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• APC PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (5)

PA5300U11FC0-1

• MS-NAE5510-2U with two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) or two N2 Bus trunks (or one BACnetMS/TP and one N2 Bus trunk) mounted on perforated panel to fit 9.25 x 24 x 24 in. enclosure

• EISK5-100T Contemporary Controls® CTRLink™ 5-Port 10/100 Ethernet Switch• APC® PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Protection (4)• PAN-PWRSP-U 120/24 VAC, 96 VA, Transformer with circuit breaker and 120 VAC outlet• SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP Transient Protection for MS/TP and SA Bus Communication (2)

SAG100U11E001

1 For details, refer to the Metasys® Smoke Control UL 864 Supervisory Engines at Release 5.2 May Experience Corrupt FlashMemory Issue Flash Sheet (2014F21). This panel is called the custom UL 864 panel in the Flash Sheet.


Table 124: UL/cUL 864 Standard and Custom Hoffman Enclosures, Transformers, and Power SuppliesDescriptionPart Number

Standard Hoffman Enclosures1

6.62 x 16 x 20 in. Enclosure with door, latch, subpanelPAN-ENH1620WDP6.62 x 16 x 20 in. Enclosure with door, latchPAN-ENH1620WD6.62 x 20 x 24 in. Enclosure with door, latch, subpanelPAN-ENH2024WDP6.62 x 20 x 24 in. Enclosure with door, latchPAN-ENH2024WD6.62 x 24 x 24 in. Enclosure with door, subpanelPAN-ENH2424WDP6.62 x 24 x 24 in. Enclosure with doorPAN-ENH2424WD6.62 x 24 x 36 in. Enclosure with door, subpanelPAN-ENH2436WDP6.62 x 24 x 36 in. Enclosure with doorPAN-ENH2436WD

Custom Hoffman Enclosures1 with Lift-Off Doors, Louvers, and Locks6.62 x 16 x 20 in. Enclosure with door, lock, subpanelPAN-ENC1620WDP6.62 x 16 x 20 in. Enclosure with door, lockPAN-ENC1620WD9.25 x 20 x 24 in. Enclosure with door, lock, subpanelPAN-ENC2024WDP9.25 x 20 x 24 in. Enclosure with door, lockPAN-ENC2024WD9.25 x 24 x 24 in. Enclosure with door, lock, subpanelPAN-ENC2424WDP9.25 x 24 x 24 in. Enclosure with cut-out door, lockPAN-ENC2424WDF9.25 x 24 x 24 in. Enclosure with door, lockPAN-ENC2424WD9.25 x 24 x 36 in. Enclosure with door, lock, subpanelPAN-ENC2436WDP9.25 x 24 x 36 in. Enclosure with cut-out door, lockPAN-ENC2436WDF9.25 x 24 x 36 in. Enclosure with door, lockPAN-ENC2436WD9.25 x 30 x 42 in. Enclosure with door, lock, subpanelPAN-ENC3042WDP9.25 x 30 x 42 in. Enclosure with door, lockPAN-ENC3042WD9.25 x 36 x 48 in. Enclosure with door, lock, subpanelPAN-ENC3648WDP9.25 x 36 x 48 in. Enclosure with door, lockPAN-ENC3648WD

Power Supplies96 VA 120/24 VAC Power Assembly (Transformer, Receptacle, 5 A Overcurrent CircuitBreaker)

PAN-PWRSP-U

96 VA 220/240 VAC Power Assembly (Transformer, Receptacle, 5 A Overcurrent CircuitBreaker). This transformer is for special applications mainly in Middle Eastern high-risebuildings that require a UL 864 UUKL 10th Edition listedMetasys smoke control application.

PAN-PWRSP-IU

Transformer, Power, Panel Mount, 120 V Primary, 24 V Secondary, 96 VA, Split Bobbin,4 A Secondary Circuit Breaker,

PAN-96VAXFR-U

Power Distribution Panel and Enclosure - Contains four PAN-96VAXFR-U transformers,120V,10 A Primary Circuit Breaker. For powering multiple VAV/VMAs

PA0P00010FC0-U

Vendor EnclosuresCTRLink Ethernet Switch Enclosure - 20 x 16 x 8.62 in. Medium Type 1 Enclosure

CTRLink Ethernet Switch Backplate - NEMAType 1, Perforated 17.00 x 14.50 in. Subpanel,fits 20 x16 in. Enclosure

A20N16BLP

A20N16MPP

UL/cUL Listed VAV Box Enclosures and Covers


Table 124: UL/cUL 864 Standard and Custom Hoffman Enclosures, Transformers, and Power SuppliesDescriptionPart NumberJohnson Controls ENVIRO-TEC® (ETI of Largo, FL) - VAV Electronic Enclosure - 16 in.Enclosure, Electronic Control, 18 GA

Johnson Controls ENVIRO-TEC (ETI of Largo, FL) - VAV Electronic Enclosure - 16 in.Cover, Electronic Control, 18 GA

00-00051-01

00-00052-01

Nailor Industries Inc., Single Duct VAV or CAV Enclosure and Cover

• 6 x 10 x 16 in. Enclosure and cover, 18 GA galvanized steel• Four screws to mount enclosure on terminal unit• Two non-pointed sheet metal screws to fasten cover to enclosure• UL/cUL 864 label on inside of enclosure from Nailor factory• Rounded corners and edges on enclosure and cover• Nailor Installation sheet IOM-CE

Visit www.nailor.com or call (281) 590-1172

CE3001A

1 All Hoffman custom enclosures have a factory-installed grounding strap (supplied by Hoffman) connecting the enclosure tothe enclosure door.

Table 125: UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Smoke Control Part Ordering and Software ToolRevision Information: Latest Controllers

Software Tool Revision1MS/TPN2DescriptionCode Number

Johnson Controls Supervisory ControllersSCT 12.0.0.3270

Launcher 1.6.0.141

xxSupports two N2 Bus or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks(or one of each); supports a maximum of 100 devices on theN2 Bus or BACnet MS/TP trunk; requires a 24 VAC powersupply; includes two RS-232-C serial ports, two USB serialports, one Ethernet port, and an MS-BAT1020-0 DataProtection Battery. Runs Microsoft Windows XP® embeddedoperating system with 512 MB SDRAM. Requires upgradelabel, SMK-UPLABL-1U, if used for UL/cUL 10th Edition.

Note: This engine has been discontinued, but to use anexisting MS-NAE5510-1U engine for UL/cUL 10thEdition, you must purchase the WES2009 operatingsystem upgrade.

MS-NAE5510-1U

(--DISCONTINUED--)

SCT 12.0.0.3270

Launcher 1.6.0.141

xxSupports two N2 Bus or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks(or one of each); supports a maximum of 100 devices on theN2 Bus or BACnet MS/TP trunk; requires a 24 VAC powersupply; includes two RS-232-C serial ports, two USB serialports, one Ethernet port, and an MS-BAT1020-0 DataProtection Battery. Runs Microsoft Windows EmbeddedStandard 2009 (WES2009) operating system with 1 GBSDRAM.

MS-NAE5510-2U

SCT 5.2.11.0200

No Launcher (Java Runtimeinstaller required)

xSupports two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks (no N2 Bus);supports a maximum of 100 devices on the BACnet MS/TPtrunk; requires a 24 VAC power supply; includes twoRS-232-C serial ports, two USB serial ports, one Ethernetport, and an MS-BAT1020-0 Data Protection Battery. RunsMicrosoft Windows Embedded Standard 2009 (WES2009)operating system with 1 GB SDRAM. Listed for UL/cUL 9thEdition only.

MS-NAE5510-2UW


http://www.nailor.com



SCT 12.0.0.3270

Launcher 1.6.0.141

xxSupports two N2 Bus or two BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) trunks(or one of each); supports a maximum of 100 devices on theN2 Bus or BACnet MS/TP trunk; requires a 24 VAC powersupply; includes two RS-232-C serial ports, two USB serialports, one Ethernet port, and an MS-BAT1020-0 DataProtection Battery. Runs Johnson Controls OEM Version ofMicrosoft Windows Embedded Standard 7 with SP1 (WES7)operating system with 2 GB SDRAM.

MS-NAE5510-3U

Johnson Controls Field Equipment ControllersCCT 4.1xSpecial field controller for use only in the FSCS panel

manufactured by ADI. This controller cannot be altered orreprogrammed in the field. An MS-FEU1610-0U controllercurrently in use for an older UL Listing must be sent to ADIfor software revision. Upgrading the controller in the fieldvoids the UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition listing.

MS-FEU1610-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xx10-Point Field Equipment Controller with 2 UI, 1 BI, 3 BO,and 4 CO; 24 VAC, SA Bus, Mounting Base

MS-FEC1611-1U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xx17-Point Field Equipment Controller with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2AO, and 4 CO; 24 VAC, SA Bus, Mounting Base

MS-FEU2610-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xx17-Point Field Equipment Controller with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2AO, and 4 CO; 24 VAC, SA Bus, Mounting Base

MS-FEC2611-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xx17-Point Field Equipment Controller with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2AO, and 4 CO; 24 VAC, SA Bus, Mounting Base; Integraldisplay and 6-button navigational touchpad

MS-FEC2621-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xx17-Point Advanced Application Field Equipment Controllerwith 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, and 4 CO; 24 VAC, MS/TP (FC)Bus, SA Bus, integral real-time clock

MS-FAC2611-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xx18-Point Advanced Application Field Equipment Controllerwith 5 UI, 4 BI, 4 CO, 2 SPDR RO, and 3 SPST RO; 24 VAC,MS/TP (FC) Bus, SA Bus, integral real-time clock

MS-FAC2612-1U

Johnson Controls Input/Output ModulesCCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x4-Point IOM with 4 BI, MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA Bus SupportMS-IOM1710-0UCCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x4-Point IOM with 4 BI, MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA Bus SupportMS-IOM1711-0UCCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x6-Point IOM with 2 UI, 2 UO, 2 BO, MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA

Bus SupportMS-IOM2710-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x6-Point IOM with 2 UI, 2 UO, 2 BO, MS/TP (FC) Bus and SABus Support

MS-IOM2711-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x12-Point IOM with 4 UI, 4 UO, 4 BO, MS/TP (FC) Bus andSA Bus Support

MS-IOM3710-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x12-Point IOM with 4 UI, 4 UO, 4 BO, MS/TP (FC) Bus andSA Bus Support

MS-IOM3711-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x17-Point IOM with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, 4 CO, 24 VAC,MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA Bus with Mounting Base

MS-IOU4710-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2x17-Point IOM with 6 UI, 2 BI, 3 BO, 2 AO, 4 CO, 24 VAC,MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA Bus with Mounting Base

MS-IOM4711-0U

Johnson Controls Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly Controllers




CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xIntegrated VAVController/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (CoolingOnly), and MS/TP (FC) Bus

MS-VMA1610-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xIntegrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (withReheat and Fan Control), and MS/TP (FC) Bus

MS-VMA1620-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xIntegrated VAVController/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (CoolingOnly), and MS/TP (FC) Bus, 3.3 volt model

MS-VMA1610-1U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xIntegrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (withReheat and Fan Control), MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA Bus, 3.3volt model

MS-VMA1620-1U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xxIntegrated VAVController/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (CoolingOnly), MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA Bus, 32-bit model

MS-VMA1615-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xxIntegrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (withReheat and Fan Control), MS/TP (FC) Bus and SABus, 32-bitmodel

MS-VMA1630-0U

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xxIntegrated VAVController/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (CoolingOnly), MS/TP (FC) Bus and SA Bus, 32-bit model, IsolationOptimized

MS-VMA1615-1U2

CCT 10.3 with RM 10.2xxIntegrated VAV Controller/Actuator/Pressure Sensor (withReheat and Fan Control), MS/TP (FC) Bus and SABus, 32-bitmodel, Isolation Optimized

MS-VMA1630-1U3

1 The software versions listed are approved by UL/cUL for smoke control. To see if approved patches are available, contactyour local Johnson Controls branch office or visit the Field Support Center (FSC) Product Quick Patches page at:https://my.jci.com/sites/BE/NAFieldSupport/quick-patches

2 This model does not ship until existing inventory of equivalent model MS-VMA1615-0U is depleted.3 This model does not ship until existing inventory of equivalent model MS-VMA1630-0U is depleted.

Table 126: UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Smoke Control Part Ordering and RevisionInformation: Legacy N2 Bus Controllers

Software ToolDescriptionCode NumberJohnson Controls Air Handling Units

HVAC PROAHU logic boardAP-AHU102-0HVAC PROAHU logic board, Buy AmericanAP-AHU102-0GHVAC PROAHU controller in UPMAP-AHU103-300

AS-AHU103-300Johnson Controls DX-9100 Field Controllers

GX-9100Extended Digital Plant Controller, Version 2DX-9100-8454

YK-DX9100-8454GX-9100Extended Digital Plant Controller, Version 2 - box of 10DX-9100-8454D

YK-DX9100-8454DGX-9100Wall Mounting Base for DX-9100, includes MOVsDX-9100-8990F

YK-DX9100-8990FJohnson Controls/York Unitary Controllers

HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, N2 isolation, andtriac--high or low side selectable, spade quick-connect terminations

AS-UNT110-1

YK-UNT110-1




Software ToolDescriptionCode NumberHVAC PROUNT110 mounted in EN-EWC10-0 enclosure with 50 VA transformerAS-UNT110-101HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 6 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and N2 isolationAS-UNT1108-0

YK-UNT1108-0HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and N2 isolationAS-UNT1008-0HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and N2 isolationAS-UNT1008-0A1HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 6 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs, and

N2 isolationAS-UNT1026-0

HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 6 binary inputs, 4 analog outputs, 4 binary outputs, andN2 isolation

AS-UNT1044-0

HVAC PRO6 binary outputs, 2 analog outputs, N2 isolation, and triac--high or lowside selectable, spade quick-connect terminations

AS-UNT111-1

YK-UNT111-1HVAC PROUNT111 mounted in EN-EWC10-0 enclosure with 50 VA transformerAS-UNT111-101

YK-UNT111-101HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs (electrically isolated),

triac--high or low side selectable, and N2 isolationAS-UNT112-1

HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 6 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs(electrically isolated), and N2 isolation

AS-UNT1126-0

YK-UNT1126-0HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs

(electrically isolated), and N2 isolationAS-UNT113-1

HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 6 binary inputs, 4 analog outputs, 4 binary outputs, andN2 isolation

AS-UNT1144-0

YK-UNT1144-0HVAC PROUNT110 controller with heater (for low temperature use)AS-UNT120-1HVAC PROUNT111 controller with heater (for low temperature use)AS-UNT121-1HVAC PROAS-UNT121-1 controller, Buy AmericanAS-UNT121-1GHVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs (electrically isolated),

triac--high or low side selectable, termination blocks, and N2 isolationAS-UNT140-1

HVAC PROAS-UNT140-1 controller, Buy AmericanAS-UNT140-1GHVAC PROUNT110 controller with screw terminals for field terminations and spare

6-pin Zone Bus phone jack, mounted in EN-EWC10-0 enclosure with 50VA transformer

AS-UNT140-101

HVAC PROYork version of AS-UNT120-1.AS-UNT220-1HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 6 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs

(electrically isolated), and N2 isolationCC-UNT1126-0S01

Johnson Controls Variable Air Volume UnitsHVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, N2 isolation, and

triac--high or low side selectable, spade quick-connect terminationsAS-VAV110-1

HVAC PROAS-VAV110-1 controller, bulk package of 10AS-VAV110-1DHVAC PROAS-VAV110-1 controller, Buy AmericanAS-VAV110-1GHVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs, N2

isolation, and triac--high or low side selectable, spade quick-connectterminations

AS-VAV111-1

HVAC PROAS-VAV111-1 controller, bulk package of 10AS-VAV111-1D



Software ToolDescriptionCode NumberHVAC PROAS-VAV111-1 controller, Buy AmericanAS-VAV111-1GHVAC PROAS-VAV111-1 controller, direct to MXAS-VAV111-1MHVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, N2 isolation, and

triac--high or low side selectable, termination blocksAS-VAV140-1

HVAC PROAS-VAV140-1 controller, Buy AmericanAS-VAV140-1GHVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs, N2

isolation, and triac--high or low side selectable, termination blocksAS-VAV141-1

HVAC PROAS-VAV141-1 controller, Buy AmericanAS-VAV141-1GHVAC PROVAV110-1 controller, with DPT-2015-1 different pressure sensorAS-VAVDPT1-1HVAC PROAS-VAVDPT1-1, Buy AmericanAS-VAVDPT1-1GHVAC PROVAV111-1 controller, with DPT-2015-1 different pressure sensorAS-VAVDPT2-1HVAC PROAS-VAVDPT2-1, Buy AmericanAS-VAVDPT2-1G

Johnson Controls Variable Air Volume Modular Assembly ControllersHVAC PRO3 analog inputs, 3 binary inputs, 2 binary outputs, integrated VAV

controller/actuator/pressure sensor (cooling only) single packAP-VMA1410-0

YK-VMA1410-0HVAC PROAP-VMA1410-0 controller, bulk package of 10AP-VMA1410-0DHVAC PROAP-VMA1410-0 controller, Buy AmericanAP-VMA1410-0GHVAC PROAP-VMA1410-0 controller, sold in MexicoAP-VMA1410-0MHVAC PROAP-VMA1410-0 controller, bulk package of 10AP-VMA1410-A01DHVAC PRO3 analog inputs, 3 binary inputs, 1 analog output, 2 binary outputs,

integrated VAV controller/actuator/pressure sensor (cooling only), bulkpackage of 10 for China

AP-VMA1415-0D

HVAC PRO4 analog inputs, 3 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 2 binary outputs,integrated VAV controller/actuator/pressure sensor (cooling with reheatand/or fan power) single pack

AP-VMA1420-0

YK-VMA1420-0

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, bulk package of 10AP-VMA1420-0DHVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, Buy AmericanAP-VMA1420-0GHVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, sold in MexicoAP-VMA1420-0MHVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, bulk package of 10AP-VMA1420-A02DHVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling only sequenceAP-VMA1420-0A01HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling with incremental

hot water reheatAP-VMA1420-0A02

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling with 3 stage electricreheat

AP-VMA1420-0A03

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling, incremental boxheating, and supplementary heating

AP-VMA1420-0A04

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling, series fan, andincremental hot water heating

AP-VMA1420-0A05

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling, parallel fan, andincremental hot water heating sequence

AP-VMA1420-0A06

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling, series fan,incremental hot water reheat, and supplementary heating

AP-VMA1420-0A07



Software ToolDescriptionCode NumberHVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling, parallel fan,

incremental hot water reheat, and supplementary heatingAP-VMA1420-0A08

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling, series fan, andelectric reheat

AP-VMA1420-0A09

HVAC PROAP-VMA1420-0 controller, factory loaded with cooling, parallel fan, andelectric reheat

AP-VMA1420-0A10

HVAC PRO4 analog inputs, 3 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 2 binary outputs,integrated VAV controller/pressure sensor (cooling only) single pack

AP-VMA1430-0

HVAC PROAP-VMA1430-0 controller, bulk package of 10AP-VMA1430-0DHVAC PROAP-VMA1430-0 controller, Buy AmericanAP-VMA1430-0GHVAC PRO4 analog inputs, 3 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 2 binary outputs,

integrated VAV controller/pressure sensor (cooling only) single pack, forMetasys zoning package single pack

AP-VMA1440-0

Johnson Controls Function ModulesHVAC PROFunctional Module kit for AS-AHU103AS-FMK102-0HVAC PROAS-FMK102-0 Function Module, Buy AmericanAS-FMK102-0GHVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 25 psi, 4 to 20 mAFM-IAP101-0HVAC PROFM-IAP101-0 Function Module, Buy AmericanFM-IAP101-0GHVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 0.1 in. WC, 4 to 20 mAFM-IDP001-0HVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 0.25 in. WC, 4 to 20 mAFM-IDP002-0HVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 0.5 in. WC, 4 to 20 mAFM-IDP005-0HVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 1 in. WC, 4 to 20 mAFM-IDP010-0HVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 3 in. WC, 4 to 20 mAFM-IDP030-0HVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 5 in. WC, 4 to 20 mAFM-IDP050-0HVAC PROFunction Module, Input: 0 to 10 in. WC, 4 to 20 mAFM-IDP100-0HVAC PROOutput Analog Pneumatic: An Electric/Pressure Transducer controlling

pneumatic devices (0-20 psi). Requires two slots.FM-OAP102-0

HVAC PROOutput Analog Pneumatic: An Electric/Pressure Transducer controllingpneumatic devices (0-20 psi). Requires two slots.

FM-OAP103-0

HVAC PROFM-OAP103-0 Function Module, Buy AmericanFM-OAP103-0GJohnson Controls Extension and Expansion Modules

XTM ConfiguratorExtension Module, N2 Communications interface and 24 VAC supplyXTM-105-5ULXTM ConfiguratorExtension Module, XT Bus communication interface and 24 VAC supplyXTM-905-5ULXTM ConfiguratorExpansion Module Analog, six analog inputs, two analog outputs without

manual overrideXPA-821-5UL

XTM ConfiguratorExpansion Module Binary, eight binary inputsXPB-821-5ULXTM ConfiguratorExpansion Module Binary, four binary inputs, three binary outputs

(latching relays with manual override)XPE-401-5UL

XTM ConfiguratorExpansionModule Binary, four binary inputs, four binary outputs (commonsupply) (electrically maintained relays with manual override, softwareconfigurable as On/Off or pulse type)

XPE-404-5UL

XTM ConfiguratorExpansion Module Binary, four binary inputs, three binary outputs(latching relays with manual override)

XPL-401-5UL



Software ToolDescriptionCode NumberXTM ConfiguratorExpansion Module Binary, four binary inputs, four binary outputs (24

VAC triacs with manual override)XPT-401-5UL

XTM ConfiguratorExpansion Module Binary, eight binary outputs (24 VAC triacs withoutmanual override)

XPT-861-5UL

Johnson Controls XT/XP ModulesHVAC PROExtension Module for DX9100XT-9100-8304

YK-XT9100-8304HVAC PROXT-9100-8304 Extension Module, Bulk PackXT-9100-8304DHVAC PROExpansion Module for DX9100XP-9100-8304HVAC PROExpansion Module Analog, six analog inputs, two analog outputsXP-9102-8304

YK-XP9102-8304HVAC PROXP-9102-8304 Expansion Module, Bulk PackXP-9102-8304D

YK-XP9102-8304DHVAC PROExpansion Module Digital, eight Digital Outputs (triacs)XP-9103-8304

YK-XP9103-8304HVAC PROXP-9103-8304 Expansion Module, Bulk PackXP-9103-8304DHVAC PROExpansion Module Digital, four Digital Inputs, four Digital Outputs (triacs)XP-9104-8304

YK-XP9104-8304HVAC PROXP-9104-8304 Expansion Module, Bulk PackXP-9104-8304DHVAC PROExpansion Module Digital, eight Digital InputsXP-9105-8304

YK-XP9105-8304HVAC PROXP-9105-8304 Expansion Module, Bulk PackXP-9105-8304DHVAC PROExpansion Module Digital, eight Digital Outputs (24V Relay)XP-9107-8304

YK-XP9107-8304Johnson Controls MOV Kits

N/ATransient protection kit for DX-9120 controller when NU-NET201-0 isinstalled

SMOKE-MOV9120

N/AMOV transient protection for MS/TP I/O communication (10 per bag)SMOKE-MOVKIT-0

SMOKE-MOVKIT-0UN/ATransorb transient suppressor for N2 Bus repeater when used in smoke

control applications (1 per bag)SMOKE-TRNKIT-0

SMOKE-TRNKIT-1

SMOKE-TRNKIT-1UN/ATransient protection kit for spade quick-connect terminations (12 MOVs

per kit); equivalent to newer SMOKE-MOVKIT-0AS-MOVKIT-0

N/AMOV transient protection for MS/TP Bus and SA Bus communication (1per bag)

SMK-MOVKIT-MSTP

N/AOne MOV board with MS/TP protection, one MOV board without MS/TPprotection, replacement for standard or custom UL 864 panels

Note: The SMK-MOVKIT-BRD kits cannot be used with VAV boxcontroller enclosures.

SMK-MOVKIT-BRD



Software ToolDescriptionCode NumberJohnson Controls Enclosures

N/AUniversal Packaging Module without power components, single unit,exterior dimensions 9 x 16 x 7.5 in. (23 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC10-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module with power entry box, single unit, exteriordimensions 9 x 16 x 7.5 in. (23 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC12-0

EN-EWC12-0Y

YK-EWC12-0YN/AUniversal Packaging Module with brackets and 50 VA power, single unit,

exterior dimensions 9 x 16 x 7.5 in. (23 x 41 x 19 cm)EN-EWC13-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module with power entry box and 50 VA power,single unit, exterior dimensions 9 x 16 x 7.5 in. (23 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC15-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module without power components, dual unit,exterior dimensions 16 x 16 x 7.5 in. (41 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC20-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module with power entry box and 50 VA power,dual unit, exterior dimensions 16 x 16 x 7.5 in. (41 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC25-0

EN-EWC25-0Y

YK-EWC25-0YN/AUniversal Packaging Module with 2 brackets and 50 VA power, single

unit, exterior dimensions 16 x 16 x 7.5 in. (41 x 41 x 19 cm)EN-EWC26-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module without power components, triple unit,exterior dimensions 23 x 16 x 7.5 in. (59 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC30-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module with power entry box and 50 VA power,triple unit, exterior dimensions 23 x 16 x 7.5 in. (59 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC35-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module without power components, quad unit,exterior dimensions 30 x 16 x 7.5 in. (77 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC40-0

N/AUniversal Packaging Module with power entry box and 50 VA power,quad unit, exterior dimensions 30 x 16 x 7.5 in. (77 x 41 x 19 cm)

EN-EWC45-0

EN-EWC45-0Y

YK-EWC45-0YN/AExpansion cover and backbone kit; endcaps not includedEN-EXP101-0N/AEnclosure for AS-XFR100-1 transformerAS-ENC100-0HVAC PROAHU103 controller in UPM.FA-AHU103-300HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs

(electrically isolated), triac-high or low side selectable, termination blocks,and N2 isolation, Facilitator product line

FA-UNT141-1

HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, N2 isolation, andtriac-high or low side selectable, termination blocks, Facilitator productline

FA-VAV140-1

HVAC PRO6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 2 analog outputs, 6 binary outputs, N2isolation, and triac-high or low side selectable, termination blocks,Facilitator product line

FA-VAV141-1

Johnson Controls AccessoriesN/ARoom sensor with LCD, compatible with VAVs, UNTs, and VMAs.AP-TMZ1600-1

TMZ1600-X

YK-TMZ1600-0



Software ToolDescriptionCode NumberN/A100 VA transformer, 120 VACAS-XFR100-1N/ARelay kit with enclosure, 2 relaysAS-RLY002-0N/ARelay kit with enclosure, 2 relaysAS-RLY050-0N/ARelay kit with enclosure, 4 relaysAS-RLY100-1N/AAS-RLY100-1 Relay kit, Buy AmericanAS-RLY100-1GN/AFume hood interface controller, 6 analog inputs, 4 binary inputs, 2 analog

outputs, 6 binary outputsAS-FHI100-0

N/AM8100 Poteau panelsM8100xxxx

Table 127: UL/cUL 864 Smoke Control AccessoriesDescriptionCode NumberAcromag® MS/TP and N2 Bus Repeater, 120 VACNU-RPT101-1UAcromag MS/TP and N2 Bus Repeater, 24 VACNU-RPT24-0UBACnet End-of-Line Terminator Module that provides EOL termination on MS/TP and N2 Bussegments when the terminating field device does not have integral EOL termination capability.

MS-BACEOL-0

Software revision labels - Ten (10) labels for NAE controllers, 30 labels for MS/TP field controllers,and 30 labels for N2 Bus field controllers per bag (70 labels total). Labels are used to upgradeto UL/cUL 864 UUKL 10th Edition Metasys Release 8.1 listing.

SMK-UPLABL-1U

Table 128: Non-UL/cUL 864 MS/TP AccessoriesDescriptionPart NumberSA Bus network sensor -SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 2% RH,setpoint adjustment, override, modular jack

NS-APA7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, setpoint adjustment, override,screw terminal

NS-APA7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, setpoint adjustment, override,F/C toggle, modular jack

NS-APB7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, setpoint adjustment, override,F/C toggle, screw terminal

NS-APB7002

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, setpoint adjustment,override, F/C toggle, modular jack

NS-BPB7001

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, 2% RH, setpoint adjustment,override, F/C toggle, screw terminal

NS-BPB7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, setpoint adjustment, override,modular jack

NS-AHA7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, setpoint adjustment, override,screw terminal

NS-AHA7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, setpoint adjustment, override,F/C toggle, modular jack

NS-AHB7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, setpoint adjustment, override,F/C toggle, screw terminal

NS-AHB7002

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, setpoint adjustment,override, F/C toggle, modular jack

NS-BHB7001


Table 128: Non-UL/cUL 864 MS/TP AccessoriesDescriptionPart NumberSA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, 3% RH, setpoint adjustment,override, F/C toggle, screw terminal

NS-BHB7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, override, modularjack

NS-ATA7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, override, screwterminal

NS-ATA7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle,override, modular jack

NS-ATB7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle,override, screw terminal

NS-ATB7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, fan control,override, modular jack

NS-ATC7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, fan control,override, screw terminal

NS-ATC7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle, fancontrol, override, modular jack

NS-ATD7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle, fancontrol, override, screw terminal

NS-ATD7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, modular jackNS-ATN7001SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, screw terminal, address switchesNS-ATN7003SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, warmer/cooler dial adjustment, override,modular jack

NS-ATP7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, warmer/cooler dial adjustment, override,screw terminal

NS-ATP7002

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle,override, modular jack, VAV balancing feature

Note: Fan control button is replaced by a light bulb button used in the balancing process.

NS-ATV7001

SA Bus network sensor - 80x80 mm, surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/C toggle,override, screw terminal, VAV balancing feature


NS-ATV7002

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, override,F/C toggle, fan control, modular jack

NS-BTB7001

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/Ctoggle, fan control, override, screw terminal

NS-BTB7002

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, modular jackNS-BTN7001SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, screw terminal, address switchesNS-BTN7003SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, warmer/ cooler dial adjustment,override, modular jack

NS-BTP7001

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, warmer/ cooler dial adjustment,override, screw terminal

NS-BTP7002


Table 128: Non-UL/cUL 864 MS/TP AccessoriesDescriptionPart NumberSA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/Ctoggle, override, modular jack, VAV balancing feature


NS-BTV7001

SA Bus network sensor - 120x80 mm, wall or surface mount, LCD, setpoint adjustment, F/Ctoggle, override, screw terminal, VAV balancing feature


NS-BTV7002

Table 129: Non-UL/cUL 864 TEC3300sDescriptionPart NumberTSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or FloatingTEC3310-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ SensorTEC3311-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, RH SensorTEC3312-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ & RH SensorTEC3313-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC PropTEC3320-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, Occ SensorTEC3321-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, RH SensorTEC3322-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, Occ & RH SensorTEC3323-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, RTU/Heat Pump with EconTEC3330-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, RTU/Heat Pump with Econ, Occ SensorTEC3331-00-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, w/o JCI LogoTEC3310-01-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3311-01-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, RH Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3312-01-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ & RH Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3313-01-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, w/o JCI LogoTEC3320-01-000TSTAT, Standalone, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, Occ Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3321-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or FloatingTEC3610-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ SensorTEC3611-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, RH SensorTEC3612-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ & RH SensorTEC3613-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC PropTEC3620-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, Occ SensorTEC3621-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, RH SensorTEC3622-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, Occ & RH SensorTEC3623-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, RTU/Heat Pump with EconTEC3630-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, RTU/Heat Pump with Econ, Occ SensorTEC3631-00-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, w/o JCI LogoTEC3610-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3611-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, RH Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3612-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, On/Off or Floating, Occ & RH Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3613-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, w/o JCI LogoTEC3620-01-000


Table 129: Non-UL/cUL 864 TEC3300sDescriptionPart NumberTSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, Occ Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3621-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, RH Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3622-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, FCU/VAV, 0-10 VDC Prop, Occ & RH Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3623-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, RTU/Heat Pump with Econ, w/o JCI LogoTEC3630-01-000TSTAT, MSTP or N2, RTU/Heat Pump with Econ, Occ Sensor, w/o JCI LogoTEC3631-01-000

Table 130: UL/cUL 864 Ethernet Switches and Media ConvertersDescriptionModel Number

Note: All switches andmedia convertersmust be installed andmounted at the factory in a Johnson Controls approvedsmoke listed enclosure. Do not purchase the switch from a third-party vendor or install it in the field.

Contemporary Controls CTRLink EISK5-100T Industrial Ethernet Switch, 5-port copper switch10/100 Base-T RJ45 Ethernet Ports

EISK5-100T

Contemporary Controls CTRLink EIS8-100T Industrial Ethernet Switch, 8 each 10/100 Base-TRJ45 Ethernet Ports

EIS8-100T

Contemporary Controls CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT Industrial Ethernet Switch, 4 each 10/100 Base-TRJ45 Ethernet Ports, 100Base-FX Fiber ports

EIS6-100TFT

Cisco Catalyst 2960-24TC-S 24-Port 10/100/1000 Ethernet Switch.

Note: The Cisco Catalyst 24-Port Copper Switch is no longer available for ordering. The ULlisting for the Cisco switch available at Release 5.2 is maintained, and the Cisco switchmay be used in theMetasysUL 864 Tenth Edition listing if you have purchased it throughJohnson Controls for a UL 864 Ninth Edition UUKL Release 5.2 job site.

2960-24TC-S


Cisco 4000-16T4G-E Industrial Ethernet (IE) Switch, 10/100/1000 Base-T RJ45, 16 Ethernetports

Note: This switch must be factory mounted in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure with a listed powersupply.

IE-4000-16T4G-E

Cisco 4010-4S24P IE Switch, 10/100/1000 Base-T RJ45, 24 Ethernet ports

Note: This switch must be factory mounted in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure with a listed powersupply. Also, PoE is not approved for this device's power supply for the UL/cUL 864UUKL 10th Edition listing.

IE-4010-4S24P

Power supply for Cisco 4000-16T4G-E IE Switch, DIN-rail mountedPWR-IE170W-PC-ACPower supply for Cisco 4010-4S24P IE Switch

(Only one power supply module per switch is approved.)

PWR-RGD-AC-DC-H

Contemporary Controls Media Converter EIMK-100T/FT (Ethernet to Fiber)

Note: To order a replacement device, use the Johnson Controls iPROC.

EIMK-100TFT

Asante® NU-RJ45SW1-0U 24-Port Ethernet Copper Switch

Note: The Asante NU-RJ45SW1-0U Copper Switch is no longer available for ordering. The ULlisting for the Asante switch available at Release 4.1 is maintained, and the Asante switchmay be used in theMetasysUL 864 Tenth Edition listing if you have purchased it throughJohnson Controls for a UL 864 Ninth Edition UUKL Release 4.1 job site.

NU-RJ45SW1-0U


Netgear® FS105 5-Port Ethernet Copper Switch

Note: The Netgear FS105 Copper Switch is no longer available for ordering. The UL listing forthe Netgear switch available at Release 4.1 is maintained, and the Netgear switch maybe used in the Metasys UL 864 Tenth Edition listing if you have purchased it throughJohnson Controls for a UL 864 Ninth Edition UUKL Release 4.1 job site.

FS105



Table 131: Third-Party EquipmentDescriptionPart NumberCDW - 025070 - Tripp Lite ISOBAR8Ultra Surge Suppressor

http://www.cdw.com

ISOBAR8Ultra

CDW - 154600 - Tripp Lite ISOBAR12Ultra Rackmount Surge Suppressor

http://www.cdw.com

ISOBAR12Ultra

CDW - 191962 - Tripp Lite ISOBAR EURO-4 Surge Suppressor

http://www.cdw.com

ISOBAR EURO-4

American Power Conversion (APC) - PNET1GB Ethernet Surge Suppressor

http://www.apc.com

PNET1GB

ADI MSTP FSCS: http://www.adipanel.com

Note: Custom product from Automation Displays, Inc. (ADI)

ADI FSCS Panel

Related DocumentationTable 132: Related Documentation

See DocumentFor Information OnMetasys System UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLCStandard Smoke Control Applications Application Note (LIT-12012544)

How the Smoke Control Applications Work

Metasys System UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLCSmoke Control System Catalog Page (LIT-1901048)

Features, Benefits, and Specifications of theMetasysSmoke Control System

Metasys System UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLCStandard Smoke Control Panels Catalog Page (LIT-1901049)

Features, Benefits, and Specifications of theMetasysSmoke Control System Panels

Fire Fighter’s Smoke Control Station (FSCS) Catalog Page(LIT-1901050)

Features, Benefits, and Specifications of theMetasysFire Fighter's Smoke Control Station

Metasys System Extended Architecture Smoke Control UL 864 UUKLCompliance Checklist (LIT-12012545)

ComplianceChecklist for theMetasysSmokeControlSystem

Metasys SCT Help (LIT-12011964)How to Use SCT to Commission System DatabasesController Tool Help (LIT-12011147)How to Use CCT to Commission MS/TP Field

ControllersHVAC PRO User’s Guide (LIT-63750402)How to Use HVAC PRO to Commission Legacy N2

Bus Field ControllersGX-9100 Software Configuration Tool User’s Guide (LIT-120182)How to Use GX-9100 to Commission DX-9100

Controller and Extension ModulesMS-BACEOL-0 RS485 End-of-Line Terminator Installation Instructions(Part No. 24-10264-4)

Installation of and Specifications for theMS-BACEOL-0 End-of-Line Terminator Module

Typical Panel Layouts for UL/cUL Smoke Control ListingThis section shows typical panel layouts for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control equipment.

Important: All panels used for smoke control must be ordered from Johnson Controls.

Device layout may differ due to the physical number of optional Smoke Control devices desired in the enclosurebecause the cumulative power requirements can not exceed the maximum specifications of the PAN-PWRSP-UPower Supply and the PAN-96VAXFR-U Power Supply (if necessary).


http://www.cdw.com

http://www.cdw.com

http://www.cdw.com

http://www.apc.com


Figure 168: Typical Ethernet Communication Enclosure: CTRLink EIS6-100T/FT Switch


Figure 169: Typical Ethernet Communication Enclosure: CTRLink EISK8-100T Switch


Figure 170: Typical NAE5510 Enclosure

Figure 171: Typical MSTP Controller Enclosure with Two Controllers


Description of OperationTo achieve effective smoke control in a facility, the Metasys system must have at least one network engine that isUL 864 UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listed. The system must also have one MetasysServer (ADS or ADX) and one Firefighters Smoke Control Station (FSCS) that is networked toMetasys. The systemmay also consist of other field controllers (for example, FECs and VMAs) networked to the UL 864 Listed networkengine. These components are solely responsible for monitoring and controlling fans and dampers that are part ofthe smoke control sequence of operations.

The FSCS is a custom panel that is manufactured by ADI and provides manual control of the smoke control system.It is composed of one or more MS-FEU1610-0U field controllers. Information flow is two-way between the FSCS'sfield controller and the network engine. The network engine receives information to determine the location of thefire and decides which smoke control commands to send. No information is sent back to the Fire Alarm system. Thenetwork engine commands the field controller to execute the necessary logic to control the emergency.

To observe failure alarms and the results of weekly smoke control tests, the building owner or operator browses intothe Metasys Server UI from a computer client. The server itself does not execute UL 864 smoke control logic. Infact, the system prevents the operator from sending smoke control commands to the controlled system. Any commandsthat a firefighter originates at the FSCS panel overrides any pre-programmed smoke control command logic.

After all fire alarm information is back to normal, the firefighter returns the FSCS into Auto mode. TheMetasys systemreturns to normal HVAC temperature, pressure, and humidity control.

Compliance Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control Listing

OverviewThis section summarizes the most common requirements to configure the Metasys system to comply with the UL864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing. A form is followed by tables listing the requirements for UL864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Listing compliance.

The purpose of the form is to provide a record of those elements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)92A and UL/cUL that Johnson Controls does or does not provide. UL/cUL is an identifier created by UL to identifythose products listed under UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition for smoke control. Products covered by this listingare intended to be installed along with Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment to form a systemfor controlling the flow of smoke in a building during a fire condition in accordance with NFPA Recommended Practice92A.

It is important that we document the system elements that are being provided. Use the form to provide thatdocumentation.

In the case where a project specification dictates compliance with the UL/cUL Listing, but contains elements of thesystem design that conflict with the Listing or are omitted, the completed can be given to the designer or the AHJto obtain recognition and agreement on the extent of Listing compliance. This should occur prior to bid or proposal.

Once an agreement is reached with the AHJ, designer, and customer, the signed or initialed Smoke ControlCompliance Checklist must become a permanent part of the project file.

If you are bidding, engineering, installing, or commissioning aMetasys system requiring UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10thEdition Smoke Control Listing compliance, follow the guidelines, requirements, and procedures listed in this documentand in the section.


Compliance SurveyTable 133: Compliance Survey for UL/cUL Smoke Control ListingDate of SurveyConducted ByProject NameJob LocationBranch OfficeProject Manager

UL/cUL Compliance Required By:

Specifications Building Codes Contract

Table 134: Applicable Building Codes and Standardstexttexttexttexttexttext

Table 135: Local (Branch) Person Providing and Verifying InformationFull NameInitialstexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttext


General Requirements Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control ListingTable 136 lists general requirements for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing compliance. Ifthe requirement was verified, mark Y (Yes) orN (No) for compliance and initialize. If the requirement is not applicable,mark NA and initialize.

Table 136: General Requirements for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control ListingVerifier'sInitials

Y / N / NARequirement

If a system upgrade was performed, the controllers have been labeled with the correctMetasys software revision.If an upgrade from Metasys Release 5.2 was performed, ADI upgraded the FEU1610-0Uin the FSCS panel to Metasys Release 8.1.The wiring guidelines for transient and surge protection have been followed as outlinedin .Communication links between buildings are fiber-optic cable or copper cable buried ina conduit separate from power wiring. Communication wiring between buildings includessurge protection devices.Each binary output object used for pressurization and exhaust control is configured withpositive feedback. The feedback input monitors the associated controlled equipmentstatus (for example, both open and closed, on and off). For smoke control dampers, theremay be a pair of feedback binary inputs for two damper end switches. Any mismatch ofa command and status of the binary output occurring longer than the allowed responsetime must create a trouble light indication at the FSCS.A positive indication of airflow is evident for all fans.Non UL/cUL Listed control equipment is isolated from the UL/cUL Listed network.The Weekly Testing of Dedicated Stairwell Pressurization Fans application is used on alldedicated smoke control systems.Automatic smoke control sequences take precedence over HVAC automatic and manualcommands. Manual FSCS takes precedence over all else.Automatic activation of any smoke control sequence of operation has priority over anynon-smoke control manual commands and any automatic environmental control strategy,when an auto smoke control sequence is initiated. High and low temperature protectiondevices and return and exhaust air-duct smoke detectors are bypassed.Response time for individual smoke control fans to reach commanded state is no morethan 60 seconds.Response time for individual smoke control dampers to reach commanded state is nomore than 75 seconds.Fire alarm systemmanual pull stations do not initiate automatic smoke control sequences.Smoke detectors are used to initiate a smoke control strategy only as detailed in .All field controllers that monitor or control smoke control equipment are UL/cUL Listed.Electrical disconnects, overloads, duct static pressure limits, and supply air duct smokedetectors are not overridden by manual or automatic smoke control strategies.


FSCS Requirements Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control ListingTable 137 lists requirements for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing compliance for FSCSswhere required. If the requirement was verified, mark Y (Yes) orN (No) for compliance and initialize. If the requirementis not applicable, mark NA and initialize.

Table 137: FSCS Requirements for UL 864 10th Edition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC ListingVerifier'sInitials


FSCS is UL/cUL Listed and provides manual control of the smoke control system, a UL/cUL Listed annunciator panel is used as FSCS.Custom annunciator FSCS is connected to a UL/cUL Listed SmokeControl engine throughthe MS/TP (FC) Bus.FSCS provides positive indication of the operation of all smoke control equipment (forexample, both open and closed, on and off).FSCS provides audible and visible trouble indication when any smoke control equipmentdoes not respond to automatic or manual commands.FSCS simultaneously displays the status of all smoke control systems dampers, fans.FSCS has manual control over all smoke control systems.FSCS can override (partially or in full) any operation in progress, including programmedactions, non-smoke control manual overrides.FSCS has highest priority over all smoke control systems.A building diagram or equivalent at FSCS clearly indicates the type and location of allsmoke control equipment (branch must obtain diagram approval from local fire marshal)FSCS indicates the actual status (not the command status) of systems and equipmentused for smoke control. This includes the current position of each damper used in anactive smoke control sequence and the status of airflow status of every fan.FSCS activates an audible signal if the operation proof sensor (binary feedback point)failed to provide positive feedback that fan or damper reached its intended position.Only one FSCS on the Metasys system is used for smoke control applications unlessapproved by the AHJ.FSCS manual activation or deactivation of any smoke control device has priority overany automatic smoke or environmental sequence of operation.Any return air duct smoke detectors in duct work of each HVAC fan system used forsmoke control exhaust or purge only reports an alarm condition to the FSCS or fire alarmannunciator located at the FSCS and does not stop the fan.All hardware supervision alarms, such as binary feedback alarms on fans and dampers,and system alarm points, turn on FSCS alarm horn.Annunciation at the FSCS to indicate smoke control equipment change of state is nomore than 10 seconds after reaching commanded state.


Wiring Requirements Checklist for UL/cUL Smoke Control ListingTable 138 lists requirements for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control Listing compliance for SmokeControl Wiring. If the requirement was verified, mark Y (Yes) orN (No) for compliance and initialize. If the requirementis not applicable, mark NA and initialize.

Table 138: Wiring Requirements for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control ListingVerifier'sInitials


Communication links between buildings are fiber-optic cable or copper cable buried ina conduit separate from power wiring. Communication wiring between buildings includessurge protection devices.If MS/TP (FC) Bus or N2 Bus signal circuits leave the room, transient protection is installedas detailed in .Verify that a Tripp Lite® ISOBAR8ULTRA surge protector or a Tripp Lite ISOBAR12ULTRAsurge protector protects all 120 VAC power sources.If fiber-optic cable is used, verify that it meets the requirements listed in .If copper cable is used, verify that it meets the requirements listed in .Verify that copper cable connected to media converters does not leave the room in whichthe media converter is installed.Verify that all RJ45 Ethernet cables are protected from electrical surges through the useof the American Power Conversion (APC) Protect Net (Model PNET1GB) surge protectorat each end of the RJ45 Ethernet cable.Verify that only the following Smoke Control NAE models are used for smoke control ina UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control system, which include:MS-NAE5510-1U, MS-NAE5510-2U, and MS-NAE5510-3UIf an NU-RPT101-1U or NU-RPT24-0U repeater is used to isolate UL/cUL from non-UL/cUL devices on an MS/TP (FC) Bus, verify that it is installed in a UL/cUL Listed enclosure.Refer to the appropriate sections of this document. The transzorb must be JohnsonControls Code No. SMOKE-TRNKIT-1U.


Application Programming Requirements for UL/cUL Smoke Control ListingTable 139 lists the requirement for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke Control compliance for Smoke ControlApplication Programming. If the requirement was verified, mark Y (Yes) or N (No) for compliance and initialize.

Table 139: Application Programming Requirements for UL 864 UUKL/UUKLC 10th Edition Smoke ControlListing

Verifier'sInitials

Y or NRequirement

The Standard Smoke Control Applications as detailed in theMetasys SystemUL 864 10thEdition UUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLC Standard Smoke Control Applications ApplicationNote (LIT-12012544) were used with no alterations to program the site’s smoke controlsystem applications.

Table 140 details the alterations to the standard smoke control applications that were required by local, state/provincial, or federal/national codes and requirements. Initial each item after verified.

Table 140: Standard Smoke Control Application Alternation DetailsVerifier's InitialsAlternations to the Standard Smoke Control Applicationstexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttexttext

The information contained within this compliance checklist is verified and accepted to be true as indicated by thedetails and signatures in Table 141.

Table 141: Smoke Control Site Acceptance InformationDate of AcceptanceProject NameLocation of ProjectBranch OfficeTitleProject Manager (signature)Branch Manager (signature)Building Engineer (signature)Building Manager/Owner (signature)Authority Having Jurisdiction (signature)

Building Technologies & Solutions507 E. Michigan Street, Milwaukee, WI 53202

Metasys® and Johnson Controls® are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls.All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners.© 2020 Johnson Controls

www.johnsoncontrols.comPublished in U.S.A.


Documents

Metasys SystemUL86410thEditionUUKL/ORD-C100-13 UUKLCSmokeControlSystem · 2020. 7. 30. · IFC-320.....36 Simplex4100ESFireAlarmControlPanel.....37